JP2006238960A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can reduce a control load. <P>SOLUTION: A jackpot variable display pattern decision table, a ready for win loss variable display decision table and a loss variable display pattern decision table are built up individually on a table of the same type so that the predetermined number of variable display patterns and commands are arranged to correspond to the tables respectively. As a result, variable display patterns corresponding to variable display pattern random numbers respectively having the same denominators can be selected and decided from anywhere in the jackpot variable display pattern decision table, the ready for win loss variable display pattern decision table and the loss variable display pattern decision table. This enables the simplification of the processing by sharing, thereby reducing the control load. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2006,JPO&NCIPI

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-228561, various fluctuation pattern commands are set by examining the value of a fluctuation pattern counter stored in a buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM at the time of big hit and loss reach, There has been proposed a gaming machine in which a predetermined variation pattern command is set and a special symbol display device variably displays the symbol according to the set variation pattern command.
JP 2004-201950 A (FIG. 14)

  By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the main control device repeats each process such as start winning process, change start process, change end process, counter update process, lost symbol counter update process and display command determination process every 2 milliseconds. Is going. For example, when the display command determination process described above is started, jump to another process by a big hit time fluctuation pattern command determination process at the time of a big hit, and a change pattern command determination process at the time of a hustle reach, and the fluctuation pattern command is The process is set and returns to the display command determination process again, and the process flow is complicated only by this display command determination process. As described above, the main control device has to perform complicated processes one after another within a limited time of 2 milliseconds, and the control load of the main control device is increased.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a control load.

  Effective solutions for achieving the above-described object will be described below. In addition, the effect | action etc. are demonstrated as needed.

(Solution 1)
A winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a player a profit based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a plurality of fluctuations comprising a predetermined effect mode according to the determination result by the winning determination means. A display device that displays one variation display pattern among the display patterns and causes the player to recognize whether or not a profit can be granted, and a main control means for performing main game control of the gaming machine; Peripheral control means for performing control based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and the plurality of variable display patterns displayed on the effect device are stored for each of the predetermined effect modes as a variable display table. Storage means, wherein the predetermined effect mode is a result of the determination when the determination result is a jackpot effect mode when the jackpot is achieved and a reach when the reach is accompanied by a reach mode. A non-winning effect mode, and a non-hit effect mode when the game is not a big hit and reach outage, and the storage means is one variation that becomes the big hit time effect mode among the plurality of variation display patterns. A big hit time fluctuation display table storage means for storing a predetermined number of variable display patterns that become the big hit time effect mode, a table in which display patterns and commands are associated with each other, and among the plurality of fluctuation display patterns, Reach shift variation display table storage that stores a table in which a variation display pattern that is a reach deviation effect mode and a command is associated with each other for each variable display pattern that is a reach shift effect mode. And one of the plurality of variable display patterns that is the off-time effect mode. A table that associates a dynamic display pattern and a command, and stores a predetermined number of variable display patterns for each of the variable display patterns serving as the off-time effect mode. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation display pattern random number within a predetermined range, random number reading means for reading the fluctuation display pattern random number, the big hit time fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means, and the The off-time fluctuation display table storage means stores the fluctuation display patterns of the stored fluctuation display patterns so that they are read out by the fluctuation display pattern random numbers composed of the same denominator read by the random number reading means. The main control means includes the winning determination means, the random number update means, and the random number. The variation display pattern corresponding to the variation display pattern random number consisting of the same denominator read by the random number reading unit according to the determination result by the reading unit and the winning determination unit is stored in the big hit hour variation display table storage Means, a variation display pattern determining means for selecting and determining from either the fluctuation display table storage means at the time of deviation or the fluctuation display table storage means at the time of deviation, and the fluctuation display pattern determined by the fluctuation display pattern determination means And a command output means for reading the command corresponding to the command and outputting the command to the peripheral control means.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined determination condition is whether or not a game ball has won the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46, and the winning determination means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101. This is the big hit determination process shown in FIG. The judgment result by the winning judgment means is a big hit judgment process. When the big hit judgment random number and the big hit judgment value coincide with each other, the big hit is judged. Except for detachment, it becomes detachment. The effect device is the effect device 40. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine 1. The main control means is a CPU 101 a mounted on the main control board 101. The peripheral control means is a CPU 111 a mounted on the sub integrated substrate 111.

  The variation display pattern and command command are the variation name and command command of the variation display pattern table shown in FIG. The big hit effect mode is a variable display pattern that is marked with “○” in the win of the variable display pattern table shown in FIG. 31. "X" is attached and the variation name includes "reach". This is a variable display pattern that does not include “reach”.

  The storage means is a ROM 101b mounted on the main control board 101. The big hit fluctuation display table, the reach deviation fluctuation display table, and the deviation fluctuation table are a big hit fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73, a reach deviation fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 74, and a deviation fluctuation display pattern shown in FIG. It is a decision table. The predetermined time is a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms). The predetermined range is a range of random display pattern random numbers (determination values) shown in FIGS. The random number updating means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a part that is updated at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms). The random number reading means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a part for reading the variable display pattern random number in the reserved storage shift processing in step S13 of the special symbol processing shown in FIG.

  The variable display pattern determining means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a part from step S41 to step S47 of the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 30. In step S41, FIG. It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag set in step 36 of the jackpot determination process shown is ON. If the big hit flag is in the ON state, a value of “1” is set in the fluctuation display flag mf in step S42, and the big hit fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 is set. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not in the ON state (in the OFF state), in step S44, the determination value set in the reach determination table in which the predetermined determination value is set, and the special symbol process shown in FIG. Whether or not to reach is determined by whether or not the reach determination random number read in the hold storage transfer process in step S13 matches. When it is determined by this determination that the reach mode is set, in step S45, the value “2” is set in the fluctuation display flag mf, and the reach deviation fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 74 is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach mode is not selected, a value “3” is set in the fluctuation display flag mf in step S46, and the deviation fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75 is set. In step S47, the variable display pattern determination table set in any of step S42, step S45, or step S46, and the variable display pattern read in the reserved memory transfer process in step S13 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. The variation display pattern is determined from the random number.

  The command output means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and the variable display pattern command set in step S47 of the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 30 is used for the special symbol process shown in FIG. This is the part that is output to the sub-integrated board 112 in the information output process of step 16.

  In this gaming machine, the winning determination means determines whether or not a profit should be given to the player based on the fact that a predetermined determination condition is satisfied. In accordance with the determination result, the effect device displays one variable display pattern among a plurality of variable display patterns having a predetermined effect mode, and allows the player to recognize whether or not a profit can be granted. The main control means performs main game control of the gaming machine. The peripheral control means performs control based on the command command transmitted from the main control means. The storage means stores a plurality of variable display patterns displayed on the effect device for each effect mode determined in advance as a variable display table. Depending on the determination result by the winning determination means, the effect mode includes a jackpot effect mode when a big win, a reach mode when a reach with a reach mode, and a miss other than a jackpot and reach miss. There is an off-direction production mode.

  The storage means includes a big hit fluctuation display table storage means, a reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means and a loss fluctuation display table storage means, and the big hit fluctuation display table storage means is a big hit effect of a plurality of fluctuation display patterns. A table in which one variation display pattern that is a mode and a command command are associated with each other is stored in a predetermined number for each variation display pattern that is a big hit effect mode. The reach deviation variation display table storage means stores a table in which one variation display pattern that is a reach deviation presentation mode and a command command among a plurality of variation display patterns is associated with a command command. A predetermined number of each is stored. The deviation variation display table storage means associates a table in which one variation display pattern, which is a deviation presentation mode, and a command command among a plurality of variation display patterns, with respect to each variation display pattern which is a deviation presentation mode. A predetermined number is stored. The big hit hour fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means and the deviation fluctuation display table storage means are the fluctuations stored by the fluctuation display pattern random number consisting of the same denominator read by the random number reading means. It stores so that each variable display pattern of the display pattern is read out.

  The main control means includes a winning judgment means, a random number updating means, a random number reading means, a fluctuation display pattern determining means, and a command output means, and the random number updating means has a fluctuation display pattern within a predetermined range every predetermined time. The random number is updated, and the random number reading means reads the updated variation display pattern random number. The fluctuation display pattern determining means changes the fluctuation display pattern corresponding to (matching with) the fluctuation display pattern random number consisting of the same denominator read by the random number reading means in accordance with the determination result by the above-described winning determination means. Selection is made from either the display table storage means, the reach fluctuation display table storage means, or the loss change display table storage means. The command output means outputs a command command corresponding to the determined variation display pattern to the peripheral control means. As described above, since the big hit time fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation time fluctuation display table storage means and the loss time fluctuation display table storage means each have a predetermined number of fluctuation display patterns and command commands associated with each other. , Composed of the same type of table. For this reason. Fluctuation display pattern consisting of the same denominator A variation display pattern corresponding to (matching with) a random number is selected from either the big hit fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means or the loss fluctuation fluctuation display table storage means. Can be determined. Therefore, since the processing can be shared, the processing can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

(Solution 2)
The gaming machine according to Solution 1, wherein the predetermined range is a range of serial numbers, and the variation display pattern random number is the jackpot variation display table storage unit, the reach deviation variation display table storage unit, and A gaming machine that is commonly used in the off-time fluctuation display table storage means.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the predetermined range is a range of serial numbers, and the variable display pattern random number is common to the big hit hour fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means and the deviation fluctuation display table storage means. Used for. In this way, a predetermined number of change display patterns and command commands are associated with each other in the order of serial numbers, and stored in the big hit change display table storage means, the reach change display table storage means, and the change display table storage means when lost. can do. For this reason, the program creator associates the variable display pattern and the command command by a predetermined number, and creates the big hit time fluctuation display table, the reach deviation time fluctuation display table, and the loss time fluctuation display table in the order of serial numbers. And it is difficult to make a mistake in the number of correspondence. In addition, since a common variation display pattern random number is used, even if any one of the big hit variation display table, the reach variation variation display table and the loss variation variation display table is selected, only one variation display pattern random number is selected. The variable display pattern corresponding to the serial number that matches the variable display pattern random number can be determined, and the processing can be shared.

(Solution 3)
A winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a player a profit based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a plurality of fluctuations comprising a predetermined effect mode according to the determination result by the winning determination means. A display device that displays one variation display pattern among the display patterns and causes the player to recognize whether or not a profit can be granted, and a main control means for performing main game control of the gaming machine; Peripheral control means for performing control based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and the plurality of variable display patterns displayed on the effect device are stored for each of the predetermined effect modes as a variable display table. Storage means, wherein the predetermined effect mode is a result of the determination when the determination result is a jackpot effect mode when the jackpot is achieved and a reach when the reach is accompanied by a reach mode. A non-winning effect mode, and a non-hit effect mode when the game is not a big hit and reach outage, and the storage means is one variation that becomes the big hit time effect mode among the plurality of variation display patterns. A big hit time fluctuation display table storage means for storing a table in which display patterns and commands are associated with each other in a sequential order of a predetermined number for each of the fluctuation display patterns serving as the big hit effect mode, and the plurality of fluctuation display patterns Among them, a table in which one variation display pattern that becomes the effect mode at the time of reach deviation is associated with a command is associated with the serial number in the same order as the serial number for each of the variable display patterns that become the effect mode at the time of reach deviation. The stored fluctuation display table storage means at the time of detachment and the plurality of fluctuation display parameters are stored. A table in which one variation display pattern that becomes the off-time effect mode and the command is associated with each other, and a serial number that is common to the serial number for each of the variable display patterns that become the off-time effect mode. The main control means includes: a winning judgment means; and a random number updating means for updating a fluctuation display pattern random number within a range of the serial number at predetermined time intervals. A random number reading means for reading the random display pattern random number, and a variable display pattern corresponding to the serial number that matches the random display pattern random number read by the random number reading means in accordance with a determination result by the winning determination means. , The big hit time fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation time fluctuation display table storage means or the front A variation display pattern determination unit that selects and determines from any of the deviation variation display table storage unit, a command corresponding to the variation display pattern determined by the variation display pattern determination unit, and reads the command into the peripheral And a command output means for outputting to the control means.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined determination condition is whether or not a game ball has won the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46, and the winning determination means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101. This is the big hit determination process shown in FIG. The judgment result by the winning judgment means is a big hit judgment process. When the big hit judgment random number and the big hit judgment value coincide with each other, the big hit is judged. Except for detachment, it becomes detachment. The effect device is the effect device 40. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine 1. The main control means is a CPU 101 a mounted on the main control board 101. The peripheral control means is a CPU 111 a mounted on the sub integrated substrate 111.

  The variation display pattern and command command are the variation name and command command of the variation display pattern table shown in FIG. The big hit effect mode is a variable display pattern that is marked with “○” in the win of the variable display pattern table shown in FIG. 31. "X" is attached and the variation name includes "reach". This is a variable display pattern that does not include “reach”.

  The storage means is a ROM 101b mounted on the main control board 101. The big hit fluctuation display table, the reach deviation fluctuation display table, and the deviation fluctuation table are a big hit fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73, a reach deviation fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 74, and a deviation fluctuation display pattern shown in FIG. It is a decision table. The predetermined time is a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms). The range of serial numbers is the range of random display pattern random numbers (judgment values) shown in FIGS. The random number updating means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a part that is updated at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms). The random number reading means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a part for reading the variable display pattern random number in the reserved storage shift processing in step S13 of the special symbol processing shown in FIG.

  The variable display pattern determining means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a part from step S41 to step S47 of the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 30. In step S41, FIG. It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag set in step 36 of the jackpot determination process shown is ON. If the big hit flag is in the ON state, a value of “1” is set in the fluctuation display flag mf in step S42, and the big hit fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 is set. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not in the ON state (in the OFF state), in step S44, the determination value set in the reach determination table in which the predetermined determination value is set, and the special symbol process shown in FIG. Whether or not to reach is determined by whether or not the reach determination random number read in the hold storage transfer process in step S13 matches. When it is determined by this determination that the reach mode is set, in step S45, the value “2” is set in the fluctuation display flag mf, and the reach deviation fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 74 is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach mode is not selected, a value “3” is set in the fluctuation display flag mf in step S46, and the deviation fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75 is set. In step S47, the variable display pattern determination table set in any of step S42, step S45, or step S46, and the variable display pattern read in the reserved memory transfer process in step S13 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. The variation display pattern is determined from the random number.

  The command output means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and the variable display pattern command set in step S47 of the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 30 is used for the special symbol process shown in FIG. This is the part that is output to the sub-integrated board 112 in the information output process of step 16.

  In this gaming machine, the winning determination means determines whether or not a profit should be given to the player based on the fact that a predetermined determination condition is satisfied. In accordance with the determination result, the effect device displays one variable display pattern among a plurality of variable display patterns having a predetermined effect mode, and allows the player to recognize whether or not a profit can be granted. The main control means performs main game control of the gaming machine. The peripheral control means performs control based on the command command transmitted from the main control means. The storage means stores a plurality of variable display patterns displayed on the effect device for each effect mode determined in advance as a variable display table. Depending on the determination result by the winning determination means, the effect mode includes a jackpot effect mode when a big win, a reach mode when a reach with a reach mode, and a miss other than a jackpot and reach miss. There is an off-direction production mode.

  The storage means includes a big hit time fluctuation display table storage means, a reach deviation time fluctuation display table storage means and a loss time fluctuation display table memory means, and the big hit time fluctuation display table storage means has a big hit time effect among a plurality of fluctuation display patterns. A table in which one variation display pattern that becomes an aspect and a command command are associated with each other is stored in the order of serial numbers by a predetermined number for each of the variation display patterns that become a big hit effect manner. The reach deviation variation display table storage means stores a table in which one variation display pattern that is a reach deviation presentation mode and a command command among a plurality of variation display patterns is associated with a command command. Are stored in the order of the serial numbers common to the above-described serial numbers. The variation display table storage unit at the time of deviation is a table in which one variation display pattern that is an effect mode at the time of deviation and a command command are associated with each other for each variation display pattern that is an effect mode at the time of loss. A predetermined number is stored in the same order as the serial numbers described above.

  The main control means includes a winning judgment means, a random number updating means, a random number reading means, a fluctuation display pattern determining means, and a command output means. The random number updating means is a variable display pattern within a range of serial numbers at predetermined time intervals. The random number is updated, and the random number reading means reads the updated variation display pattern random number. The fluctuation display pattern determining means is configured to display the fluctuation display pattern corresponding to the serial number that matches the read fluctuation display pattern random number according to the determination result by the winning determination means described above, when the big hit time fluctuation display table storage means and reach are not Selection is made from either the fluctuation display table storage means or the off-time fluctuation display table storage means. The command output means outputs a command command corresponding to the determined variation display pattern to the peripheral control means. Thus, since the big hit time fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means and the deviation fluctuation display table storage means, the fluctuation display pattern and the command command are associated with each other in the order of a common serial number. Consists of tables of the same type. For this reason, the variation display pattern corresponding to the serial number that matches the variation display pattern random number is selected from either the big hit variation display table storage means, the reach deviation variation display table storage means or the loss variation variation display table storage means. Can be determined. Therefore, since the processing can be shared, the processing can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

(Solution 4)
The game machine according to Solution 3, wherein the random display pattern random number is commonly used by the big hit hour fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means, and the loss fluctuation fluctuation display table storage means. A gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the variable display pattern random number is commonly used by the big hit time fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation time fluctuation display table storage means and the loss time fluctuation display table storage means. In this way, only one variation display pattern random number corresponds to the serial number that matches the variation display pattern random number, regardless of which of the big hit variation display table, the loss variation variation display table, and the loss variation variation display table is selected. The variable display pattern to be determined can be determined, and the processing can be shared.

(Solution 5)
A winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a player a profit based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a plurality of fluctuations comprising a predetermined effect mode according to the determination result by the winning determination means. A display device that displays one variation display pattern among the display patterns and causes the player to recognize whether or not a profit can be granted, and a main control means for performing main game control of the gaming machine; Peripheral control means for performing control based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and the plurality of variable display patterns displayed on the effect device are stored for each of the predetermined effect modes as a variable display table. Storage means, wherein the predetermined effect mode is a result of the determination when the determination result is a jackpot effect mode when the jackpot is achieved and a reach when the reach is accompanied by a reach mode. A non-winning effect mode, and a non-hit effect mode when the game is not a big hit and reach outage, and the storage means is one variation that becomes the big hit time effect mode among the plurality of variation display patterns. A big hit time fluctuation display table storage means for storing a predetermined number of variable display patterns that become the big hit time effect mode, a table in which display patterns and commands are associated with each other, and among the plurality of fluctuation display patterns, Reach shift variation display table storage that stores a table in which a variation display pattern that is a reach deviation effect mode and a command is associated with each other for each variable display pattern that is a reach shift effect mode. And one of the plurality of variable display patterns that is the off-time effect mode. A table that associates a dynamic display pattern and a command, and stores a predetermined number of variable display patterns for each of the variable display patterns serving as the off-time effect mode. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation display pattern random number within a predetermined range, random number reading means for reading the fluctuation display pattern random number, the big hit time fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means, and the The off-time fluctuation display table storage means stores the fluctuation display patterns of the stored fluctuation display patterns so that they are read out by the fluctuation display pattern random numbers composed of the same denominator read by the random number reading means. The main control means includes the winning determination means, the random number update means, and the random number. The predetermined range of any one of the big hit time fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means, or the loss fluctuation fluctuation display table storage means according to the determination result by the reading means and the winning determination means Instructing means for instructing the address of the variable display pattern corresponding to the head number in the head address as the head address, and the variable display pattern random number consisting of the same denominator read by the random number reading means is instructed by the instruction means. The variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern corresponding to the added address by adding the offset value to the head address, and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means Command to be read and sent to the peripheral control means Gaming machine, characterized in that it comprises a command output means for force, the.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined determination condition is whether or not a game ball has won the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46, and the winning determination means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101. This is the big hit determination process shown in FIG. The judgment result by the winning judgment means is a big hit judgment process. When the big hit judgment random number and the big hit judgment value coincide with each other, the big hit is judged. Except for detachment, it becomes detachment. The effect device is the effect device 40. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine 1. The main control means is a CPU 101 a mounted on the main control board 101. The peripheral control means is a CPU 111 a mounted on the sub integrated substrate 111.

  The variation display pattern and command command are the variation name and command command of the variation display pattern table shown in FIG. The big hit effect mode is a variable display pattern that is marked with “○” in the win of the variable display pattern table shown in FIG. 31. "X" is attached and the variation name includes "reach". This is a variable display pattern that does not include “reach”.

  The storage means is a ROM 101b mounted on the main control board 101. The big hit fluctuation display table, the reach deviation fluctuation display table, and the deviation fluctuation table are a big hit fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73, a reach deviation fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 74, and a deviation fluctuation display pattern shown in FIG. It is a decision table. The predetermined time is a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms). The predetermined range is a range of random display pattern random numbers (determination values) shown in FIGS. The random number updating means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a part that is updated at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms). The random number reading means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a part for reading the variable display pattern random number in the reserved storage shift processing in step S13 of the special symbol processing shown in FIG.

  The instruction means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a part of step S41, step 42, step S44, step 45 and step S46 of the variable display pattern setting process of FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag set in step 36 of the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 29 is ON. If the big hit flag is in the ON state, a value of “1” is set in the fluctuation display flag mf in step S42, and the big hit fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 is set. At this time, the top address (address of determination value 0) of the big hit variation display pattern determination table is set. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not in the ON state (in the OFF state), in step S44, the determination value set in the reach determination table in which the predetermined determination value is set, and the special symbol process shown in FIG. Whether or not to reach is determined by whether or not the reach determination random number read in the hold storage transfer process in step S13 matches. When it is determined by this determination that the reach mode is set, in step S45, the value “2” is set in the fluctuation display flag mf, and the reach deviation fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 74 is set. At this time, the start address (address of determination value 0) of the reach deviation variation display pattern determination table is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach mode is not selected, a value “3” is set in the fluctuation display flag mf in step S46, and the deviation fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75 is set. At this time, the head address (address of determination value 0) of the deviation variation display pattern determination table is set.

  The variable display pattern determining means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a part of step S43 and step S47 of the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 30, and is step S42, step S45 or step S46. As the offset value, the variable display pattern random number read in the reserved memory shift process in step S13 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 28 is added as the offset value, and the variable display corresponding to the added address is added. This is the part that determines the pattern.

  The command output means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and the variable display pattern command set in step S47 of the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 30 is used for the special symbol process shown in FIG. This is the part that is output to the sub-integrated board 112 in the information output process of step 16.

  In this gaming machine, the winning determination means determines whether or not a profit should be given to the player based on the fact that a predetermined determination condition is satisfied. In accordance with the determination result, the effect device displays one variable display pattern among a plurality of variable display patterns having a predetermined effect mode, and allows the player to recognize whether or not a profit can be granted. The main control means performs main game control of the gaming machine. The peripheral control means performs control based on the command command transmitted from the main control means. The storage means stores a plurality of variable display patterns displayed on the effect device for each effect mode determined in advance as a variable display table. Depending on the determination result by the winning determination means, the effect mode includes a jackpot effect mode when a big win, a reach mode when a reach with a reach mode, and a miss other than a jackpot and reach miss. There is an off-direction production mode.

  The storage means includes a big hit fluctuation display table storage means, a reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means and a loss fluctuation display table storage means, and the big hit fluctuation display table storage means is a big hit effect of a plurality of fluctuation display patterns. A table in which one variation display pattern that is a mode and a command command are associated with each other is stored in a predetermined number for each variation display pattern that is a big hit effect mode. The reach deviation variation display table storage means stores a table in which one variation display pattern that is a reach deviation presentation mode and a command command among a plurality of variation display patterns is associated with a command command. A predetermined number of each is stored. The deviation variation display table storage means associates a table in which one variation display pattern, which is a deviation presentation mode, and a command command among a plurality of variation display patterns, with respect to each variation display pattern which is a deviation presentation mode. A predetermined number is stored. The big hit hour fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means and the deviation fluctuation display table storage means are the fluctuations stored by the fluctuation display pattern random number consisting of the same denominator read by the random number reading means. It stores so that each variable display pattern of the display pattern is read out.

  The main control means includes a winning judgment means, a random number updating means, a random number reading means, an instruction means, a variable display pattern determining means, and a command output means, and the random number updating means is within a predetermined range every predetermined time. The variable display pattern random number is updated, and the random number reading means reads the updated variable display pattern random number. The instructing means is a leading number in a predetermined range of either the big hit fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means, or the loss fluctuation display table storage means in accordance with the determination result by the above-described winning determination means. The address of the variation display pattern corresponding to is designated as the head address. The variation display pattern determining means adds the variation display pattern random number consisting of the same denominator read by the random number reading means as an offset value to the head address designated by the instruction means, and corresponds to the added address. Determine the variable display pattern. The command output means outputs a command command corresponding to the determined variation display pattern to the peripheral control means. As described above, since the big hit time fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation time fluctuation display table storage means and the loss time fluctuation display table storage means each have a predetermined number of fluctuation display patterns and command commands associated with each other. , Composed of the same type of table. For this reason, by adding a variable display pattern random number consisting of the same denominator as an offset value to the top address of the big hit time fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means and the deviation fluctuation display table storage means, The fluctuation table pattern can be determined, and control becomes easier. Further, since the process can be shared, the process can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

(Solution 6)
The gaming machine according to the solution 5, wherein the predetermined range is a range of serial numbers, and the variation display pattern random number is the jackpot variation display table storage unit, the reach deviation variation display table storage unit, and A gaming machine that is commonly used in the off-time fluctuation display table storage means.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the predetermined range is a range of serial numbers, and the variable display pattern random number is common to the big hit hour fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means and the deviation fluctuation display table storage means. Used for. In this way, a predetermined number of change display patterns and command commands are associated with each other in the order of serial numbers, and stored in the big hit change display table storage means, the reach change display table storage means, and the change display table storage means when lost. can do. For this reason, the program creator associates the variable display pattern and the command command by a predetermined number, and creates the big hit time fluctuation display table, the reach deviation time fluctuation display table, and the loss time fluctuation display table in the order of serial numbers. And it is difficult to make a mistake in the number of correspondence. Further, the instruction means changes according to the determination result by the winning judgment means, the fluctuation corresponding to the leading number of either the big hit fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means or the loss fluctuation display table storage means. In order to indicate the display pattern address as the head address, only one variable display pattern random number is added as an offset value to the head address instructed by the instruction means. Corresponding variable display patterns can be determined, and processing can be shared.

(Solution 7)
A winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a player a profit based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a plurality of fluctuations comprising a predetermined effect mode according to the determination result by the winning determination means. A display device that displays one variation display pattern among the display patterns and causes the player to recognize whether or not a profit can be granted, and a main control means for performing main game control of the gaming machine; Peripheral control means for performing control based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and the plurality of variable display patterns displayed on the effect device are stored for each of the predetermined effect modes as a variable display table. Storage means, wherein the predetermined effect mode is a result of the determination when the determination result is a jackpot effect mode when the jackpot is achieved and a reach when the reach is accompanied by a reach mode. A non-winning effect mode, and a non-hit effect mode when the game is not a big hit and reach outage, and the storage means is one variation that becomes the big hit time effect mode among the plurality of variation display patterns. A big hit time fluctuation display table storage means for storing a table in which display patterns and commands are associated with each other in a sequential order of a predetermined number for each of the fluctuation display patterns serving as the big hit effect mode, and the plurality of fluctuation display patterns Among them, a table in which one variation display pattern that becomes the effect mode at the time of reach deviation is associated with a command is associated with the serial number in the same order as the serial number for each of the variable display patterns that become the effect mode at the time of reach deviation. The stored fluctuation display table storage means at the time of detachment and the plurality of fluctuation display parameters are stored. A table in which one variation display pattern that becomes the off-time effect mode and the command is associated with each other, and a serial number that is common to the serial number for each of the variable display patterns that become the off-time effect mode. The main control means includes: a winning judgment means; and a random number updating means for updating a fluctuation display pattern random number within a range of the serial number at predetermined time intervals. , Random number reading means for reading the fluctuation display pattern random number, and the big hit fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means or the deviation fluctuation display table storage according to the determination result by the winning determination means The address of the variable display pattern corresponding to the first number of the serial number of any of the means An instruction means for instructing as a head address and the variable display pattern random number read by the random number reading means are added as an offset value to the head address instructed by the instruction means. A variable display pattern determining means for determining a corresponding variable display pattern; a command output means for reading a command corresponding to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means and outputting the command to the peripheral control means; The game machine characterized by including.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined determination condition is whether or not a game ball has won the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46, and the winning determination means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101. It is a big hit determination process. The judgment result by the winning judgment means is a big hit judgment process. When the big hit judgment random number and the big hit judgment value coincide with each other, the big hit is judged. Except for detachment, it becomes detachment. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine 1. The main control means is a CPU 101 a mounted on the main control board 101. The peripheral control means is a CPU 111 a mounted on the sub integrated substrate 111.

  The variation display pattern and command command are the variation name and command command of the variation display pattern table shown in FIG. The big hit effect mode is a variable display pattern that is marked with “○” in the win of the variable display pattern table shown in FIG. 31. "X" is attached and the variation name includes "reach". This is a variable display pattern that does not include “reach”.

  The storage means is a ROM 101b mounted on the main control board 101. The big hit fluctuation display table, the reach deviation fluctuation display table, and the deviation fluctuation table are a big hit fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73, a reach deviation fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 74, and a deviation fluctuation display pattern shown in FIG. It is a decision table. The predetermined time is a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms). The range of serial numbers is the range of random display pattern random numbers (judgment values) shown in FIGS. The random number updating means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a part that is updated at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms). The random number reading means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a part for reading the variable display pattern random number in the reserved storage shift processing in step S13 of the special symbol processing shown in FIG.

  The instruction means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a part of step S41, step 42, step S44, step 45 and step S46 of the variable display pattern setting process of FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag set in step 36 of the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 29 is ON. If the big hit flag is in the ON state, a value of “1” is set in the fluctuation display flag mf in step S42, and the big hit fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 is set. At this time, the top address (address of determination value 0) of the big hit variation display pattern determination table is set. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not in the ON state (in the OFF state), in step S44, the determination value set in the reach determination table in which the predetermined determination value is set, and the special symbol process shown in FIG. Whether or not to reach is determined by whether or not the reach determination random number read in the hold storage transfer process in step S13 matches. When it is determined by this determination that the reach mode is set, in step S45, the value “2” is set in the fluctuation display flag mf, and the reach deviation fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 74 is set. At this time, the start address (address of determination value 0) of the reach deviation variation display pattern determination table is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach mode is not selected, a value “3” is set in the fluctuation display flag mf in step S46, and the deviation fluctuation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75 is set. At this time, the head address (address of determination value 0) of the deviation variation display pattern determination table is set.

  The variable display pattern determining means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a part of step S43 and step S47 of the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 30, and is step S42, step S45 or step S46. As the offset value, the variable display pattern random number read in the reserved memory shift process in step S13 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 28 is added as the offset value, and the variable display corresponding to the added address is added. This is the part that determines the pattern.

  The command output means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and the variable display pattern command set in step S47 of the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 30 is used for the special symbol process shown in FIG. This is the part that is output to the sub-integrated board 112 in the information output process of step 16.

  In this gaming machine, the winning determination means determines whether or not a profit should be given to the player based on the fact that a predetermined determination condition is satisfied. In accordance with the determination result, the effect device displays one variable display pattern among a plurality of variable display patterns having a predetermined effect mode, and allows the player to recognize whether or not a profit can be granted. The main control means performs main game control of the gaming machine. The peripheral control means performs control based on the command command transmitted from the main control means. The storage means stores a plurality of variable display patterns displayed on the effect device for each effect mode determined in advance as a variable display table. Depending on the determination result by the winning determination means, the effect mode includes a jackpot effect mode when a big win, a reach mode when a reach with a reach mode, and a miss other than a jackpot and reach miss. There is an off-direction production mode.

  The storage means includes a big hit time fluctuation display table storage means, a reach deviation time fluctuation display table storage means and a loss time fluctuation display table memory means, and the big hit time fluctuation display table storage means has a big hit time effect among a plurality of fluctuation display patterns. A table in which one variation display pattern that becomes an aspect and a command command are associated with each other is stored in the order of serial numbers by a predetermined number for each of the variation display patterns that become a big hit effect manner. The reach deviation variation display table storage means stores a table in which one variation display pattern that is a reach deviation presentation mode and a command command among a plurality of variation display patterns is associated with a command command. Are stored in the order of the serial numbers common to the above-described serial numbers. The variation display table storage unit at the time of deviation is a table in which one variation display pattern that is an effect mode at the time of deviation and a command command are associated with each other for each variation display pattern that is an effect mode at the time of loss. A predetermined number is stored in the same order as the serial numbers described above.

  The main control means includes a winning judgment means, a random number updating means, a random number reading means, an instruction means, a variable display pattern determining means, and a command output means. The random number updating means is within a range of serial numbers at predetermined time intervals. The variable display pattern random number is updated, and the random number reading means reads the updated variable display pattern random number. The instructing means corresponds to the leading number of the serial number of the big hit fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means or the loss fluctuation display table storage means in accordance with the determination result by the winning determination means described above. The address of the variable display pattern to be designated is designated as the head address. The fluctuation display pattern determining means adds the fluctuation display pattern random number read by the random number reading means as an offset value to the head address indicated by the instruction means, and determines the fluctuation display pattern corresponding to the added address. . The command output means outputs a command command corresponding to the determined variation display pattern to the peripheral control means. Thus, since the big hit time fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means and the deviation fluctuation display table storage means, the fluctuation display pattern and the command command are associated with each other in the order of a common serial number. Consists of tables of the same type. Therefore, the variation display pattern is determined by adding the variation display pattern random number as an offset value to the head address of the big hit variation display table storage unit, the reach variation variation display table storage unit and the loss variation display table storage unit. Can be easy to control. Further, since the process can be shared, the process can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

(Solution 8)
The gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein the random display pattern random number is commonly used by the big hit time fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means, and the loss fluctuation fluctuation display table storage means. A gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the variable display pattern random number is commonly used by the big hit time fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation time fluctuation display table storage means and the loss time fluctuation display table storage means. In this way, the instruction means, depending on the determination result by the winning judgment means, the leading number of the serial number of either the big hit fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means or the loss fluctuation display table storage means In order to designate the address of the variable display pattern corresponding to as the head address, only one variable display pattern random number is added as an offset value to the head address instructed by the instruction means. The variable display pattern corresponding to the address thus set can be determined, and the processing can be made common.

(Solution 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of the solving means 2 to 4 and 6 to 8, wherein the range of the serial number is an integer from 0 to 99.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the serial number is an integer from 0 to 99. In this way, each variation display table has 100 correspondence relationships between the variation display pattern and the command command, so the number of one variation display pattern included in the variation display table is the ratio of the variation display table, Percentage calculations can be performed easily. Therefore, the program creator can easily create the variable display table.

(Solution 10)
The gaming machine according to any one of the solving means 2 to 4 and 6 to 9, wherein the deviation variation display table storage means associates at least one variation display pattern and the command that are in the deviation presentation mode. A gaming machine that stores the tables in the same order as the serial numbers.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the off-time variation display table storage means stores a table in which at least one variation display pattern that is an off-time effect mode and a command command are associated with each other in the order of common serial numbers. In this way, the fluctuation display table storage means at the time of loss can be configured by a table of the same type as the fluctuation display table storage means at the time of big hit and the fluctuation display table storage means at the time of loss.

(Solution 11)
The gaming machine according to any one of the solving means 1 to 10, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, since the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, the effects of the solving means 1 to 10 can be obtained in the pachinko gaming machine. As a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, a game ball is driven into a game area (game area 12 in this embodiment) in accordance with an operation of an operation means (in this embodiment, an operation handle 18). Image display means (in this embodiment, the display area 42 in the effect device 40) on condition that a winning opening provided in the game area (in this embodiment, the starting winning opening 45, the electric starting winning opening 46) is won. The symbol information (in this embodiment, left decorative symbol 80a, middle decorative symbol 80b, right decorative symbol 80c) is displayed in a variable manner, and the display result of the symbol information is stopped and displayed. Further, when a profit granting state (in this embodiment, a big hit gaming state) occurs, the big winning opening (in this embodiment, the large winning opening 61) provided in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner, A winning is made possible, and based on the winning, a gaming privilege (awarding a prize ball, writing a point on a magnetic card, etc.) is given to the player.

(Solution 12)
The gaming machine according to any one of the solving means 1 to 10, wherein the gaming machine is a spinning type gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, since the gaming machine is a spinning type gaming machine, the effects of the solving means 1 to 10 can be obtained in the spinning type gaming machine. As a basic configuration of the spinning machine, after a symbol information string (for example, a plurality of reel columns with a plurality of symbol information) composed of a plurality of symbol information is variably displayed, the display result of the symbol information is stopped and displayed. In addition to the fluctuation display means, the fluctuation display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the start operation means (for example, the operation lever), and the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or based on the elapse of a predetermined time. Stop changing the symbol information. And it is provided with the profit provision state generation | occurrence | production means which generate | occur | produces a profit provision state (big hit game state) on the condition that symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode.

(Solution means 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of the solving means 1 to 10, wherein the gaming machine is a gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a revolving type gaming machine are fused.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, since the gaming machine is a gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a spinning-type gaming machine are fused, in the gaming machine in which the pachinko gaming machine and the spinning-type gaming machine are fused, the solution means The effect of 1-10 is obtained. In addition, as a basic configuration of a gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a revolving-type gaming machine are fused, a symbol information string composed of a plurality of symbol information (for example, a plurality of reel rows with a plurality of symbols) is variably displayed. After that, it is provided with a fluctuation display means for stopping and displaying the display result of the symbol information, and starting the fluctuation display of the symbol information based on the operation of the start operation means (for example, the operation lever), and the stop operation means (for example, The change display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button) or the elapse of a predetermined time. And it is provided with the profit grant state generation means which generates a profit grant state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and the symbol information is used by using a game ball as a game medium. A predetermined number of game balls are required at the start of the change, and a large amount of game balls are paid out when a profit granting state occurs.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the control load can be reduced.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the pachinko machine with the main body frame and the front frame opened.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but a game medal is used as a gaming medium, and a symbol information string (for example, a plurality of reel arrays with a plurality of symbol information attached thereto). ) Is displayed in a variable manner, and the variable information display means for stopping and displaying the display result of the symbol information is provided, and the variable information display is started based on the operation of the start operation means (for example, the operation lever), and the stop operation is performed. The present invention can also be applied to a spinning-type game machine (slot machine) that stops display of fluctuations in symbol information based on operation of means (for example, a stop button) or elapse of a predetermined time. Further, the present invention can also be applied to a game machine (parrot) in which a pachinko machine that uses a game ball as a game medium to perform a game of a revolving game machine and a revolving game machine.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a game board 4, a front frame 5, and the like. The outer frame 2 is formed in a vertically rectangular frame shape by upper, lower, left and right frame members, and has a lower plate 6 that receives the lower surface of the main body frame 3 at the lower front side of the outer frame 2. A main body frame 3 is attached to the front side of the outer frame 2 by a hinge mechanism 7 so as to be opened and closed forward. Further, the main body frame 3 is configured by integrally molding the front frame body 8, the game board mounting frame 9, and the mechanism mounting frame 10 with a synthetic resin material. The front frame 8 formed on the front side of the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape excluding the support plate 6 on the front side of the outer frame 2. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island, the side that can be visually recognized by the player is the front side, and the opposite side (for example, the main body frame 3 side with respect to the front frame body 8) is the front side. The rear side.

  A game board 4 is attached to the game board mounting frame 9 integrally formed at the rear part of the front frame body 8 so as to be detachable and replaceable from the front. A guide rail 11 having an outer rail and an inner rail is provided on the board surface (front surface) of the game board 4, and a game area 12 is defined inside the guide rail 11. A low-frequency speaker 14 is mounted via a speaker mounting plate 13 near one side of the front lower portion of the front frame 8 positioned below the game board mounting frame 9. A launch rail 15 that guides a game ball toward the launch path of the game board 4 is attached to the upper portion in the lower region of the front surface of the front frame 8 in an inclined manner. On the other hand, a lower front member 16 is attached to a lower portion in the lower area of the front surface of the front frame body 8. A lower pan 17 is provided substantially at the center of the front surface of the lower front member 16, and an operation handle 18 is provided closer to one side.

  A function of locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is provided on the rear surface of the main body frame 3 (front frame body 8) opposite to the side where the hinge mechanism 7 is provided. A locking device 19 having a function of locking the front frame 5 is attached. The locking device 19 includes a plurality of upper and lower body frame locking hooks 21 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 20 provided on the outer frame 2 to lock the main body frame 3 in a closed state, and an open side of the front frame 5. There are provided a plurality of upper and lower door locking hooks 23 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 22 provided on the rear surface and lock the front frame 5 in a closed state. Then, the key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 24 and rotated in one direction, so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 21 and the closing tool 20 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is released. When the key is locked and the key is rotated in the opposite direction, the engagement between the door locking hook 23 and the closing tool 22 of the front frame 5 is released, and the front frame 5 is unlocked. ing. The front end portion of the cylinder lock 24 is exposed to the front surface of the lower front member 16 through the front frame 8 and the lower front member 16 so that the unlocking operation can be performed by inserting a key from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Are arranged.

  In this embodiment, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction, the main body frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2, and the key is rotated in the counterclockwise direction. Either the main body frame 3 or the front frame 5 can be unlocked only by changing the direction of the rotation operation so that the front frame 5 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 3. The locking device 19 also locks the main body frame locking hook 21 so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 21 and the closing tool 20 of the outer frame 2 is not released by an external operation other than the key when the main body frame 3 is locked in the closed state. Further, a lock mechanism for locking 21 is provided. When the main body frame 3 is locked in the closed state, the main body frame locking hook 21 is locked by the locking mechanism, and further, the main body frame locking hook 21 is recessed away from the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 (front frame 8). By disposing in the above position, the main body frame locking hook 21 is operated by a wire inserted from the gap to prevent an unauthorized attempt to unlock the main body frame 3.

  A front frame 5 is attached to one side of the front surface of the main body frame 3 by a hinge mechanism 25 so as to be opened and closed forward. The front frame 5 includes a door body frame 26, a side decoration device 27, an upper plate 28, and an acoustic illumination device 29. The door main body frame 26 is formed of a pressed metal frame member, and is formed to have a size that covers a portion extending from the upper end of the front frame body 8 to the upper edge of the lower front member 16. A substantially circular opening window 30 through which the game area 12 of the game board 4 can be seen through from the front is formed at substantially the center of the door body frame 26. Further, a window frame 31 having a rectangular frame shape larger than the opening window 30 is provided on the rear side of the door body frame 26, and a transparent plate 32 is attached to the window frame 31.

  In this embodiment, the gaming area 12 formed on the game board 4 is formed by disposing the cylinder lock 24 below the game board 4 and thinning the locking device 19 arranged on the right side of the game board 4. Can be expanded more than before, and further, by providing large-sized character bodies 150, 152, and 154, which will be described later, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in viewing. Further, by enlarging the game area 12, even if an effect device 40 described later is arranged in the central portion of the game area 12, the start prize opening 45 or the electric start prize prize opening 46 arranged below the effect apparatus 40 is provided. It doesn't make it difficult to guide the game ball. In addition, the opening window 30 of the front frame 8 is enlarged in accordance with the enlargement of the game area 12, and the rigidity of the front frame 8 is reduced. However, the front frame 8 that integrally forms the upper plate 28 is used. Thus, a decrease in rigidity of the front frame 8 is suppressed.

  On the front side of the door main body frame 26, an upper plate 28 is provided in the lower part around the opening window 30, a side decoration device 27 is mounted on both left and right sides, and an acoustic decoration device 29 is mounted on the upper part. The side decoration device 27 is mainly configured by a side decoration body 33 in which a lamp substrate is disposed and formed of a synthetic resin material. A plurality of slit-like opening holes that are long in the horizontal direction are arranged in the side decoration body 33 in the vertical direction, and a lens 34 corresponding to a light source disposed on the lamp substrate is incorporated in the opening hole. The acoustic illumination device 29 includes a transparent cover body 35, a speaker 36, a speaker cover 37, a reflector body (not shown), and the like, and these constituent members are assembled together to form a unit.

  Next, various components provided in the game area 12 partitioned on the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board 4.

  An effect device 40 is disposed in the central portion of the game area 12. The stage device 40 includes a special symbol display 41 that variably displays special symbols by lighting a plurality of light emitters, and a predetermined condition is established by lighting of the plurality of light emitters (a start winning port 45 or an electric start winning port 46). A special figure memory lamp 54 that displays the number of memories (starting memory number) for which a special symbol has not yet started yet, and a plurality of types consisting of three symbols, left, middle and right And a liquid crystal display 116 having a display area 42 for displaying various effects as well as a front unit 140 and a rear unit 142 to be described later. Further, effect lamps 44 a and 44 b are attached to the right side portion of the effect device 40. These effect lamps 44a and 44b perform lighting display in accordance with the effect display by the display area 42.

  Below the stage device 40, there are provided a start winning opening 45 and an electric start winning opening 46 having a pair of opening and closing blades 47 below. When the display result of the normal symbol display 50 is “winning”, the electric start winning prize port 46 has a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times (for example, once in 0.5 seconds in the normal state, or It is controlled so that it is released 3 times in 0.8 seconds during the probability fluctuation state. In this embodiment, the starting winning port 45 can always win a game ball from above, and the electric starting winning port 46 is blocked by the starting winning port 45 at the top, and the open / close wing 47 is closed. In this case, the game ball is in a state where it is impossible to win a prize. Therefore, the game ball can be won only when the opening / closing wing 47 is in the open state.

  In addition, the game balls won in the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46 are detected by the start opening sensors 55a and 55b (only reference numerals are shown in FIG. 25), and predetermined based on these detections (predetermined conditions are established). A number of game balls are paid out (for example, three when winning (detected by the start sensor 55a) at the start winning opening 45, and four when winning (detected by the start sensor 55b) at the electric start winning sensor 46). The symbol display 41 permits the variation display of the special symbol (the variation display of the decorative symbol in the display area 42). It is to be noted that when a game ball is won at the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46 and a game ball is detected by the start opening sensors 55a and 55b, it is determined whether or not a big hit gaming state to be described later is given. When the determination random number is extracted and it is determined that the big hit gaming state is given, the display result of the special symbol on the special symbol display 41 is determined to be a hit (specific display mode). Also, the jackpot determination random number extracted based on the fact that the game ball has won the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46 and is detected by the start opening sensor 55 during the change of the special symbol, is a predetermined number ( For example, up to four) can be stored, and the stored number (starting stored number) is displayed by turning on the special-purpose memory lamp 54 composed of a plurality of (for example, four) light emitters. The special figure memory lamp 54 is disposed below the effect device 40. Further, in this embodiment, two start winning ports, a start winning port 45 and an electric start winning port 46, are provided as winning ports for which the variation display of special symbols is permitted. The number of installation is not limited to these. For example, only one of the start winning opening 45 and the electric starting winning opening 46 may be provided.

  In this embodiment, three game balls are paid out when winning at the start winning opening 45 and four game balls are paid out when winning at the electric start winning opening 46. Since the start winning opening 45 can always win a game ball from above, if there are too many payouts for winning a game ball, it will be a loss for the hole. On the other hand, the electric start winning opening 46 is controlled to extend the opening time and the number of opening times of the open wings 47 in a short time state to be described later, and the winning probability to the electric starting winning opening 46 is increased. If the amount of game balls consumed in the game is large and the number of game balls to be paid out is too small, it is a loss for a player who does not want to reduce the number of game balls. In consideration of these game balances, the number of payouts for each of the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46 is set.

  On the left side of the game area 12, a normal symbol display 50 is provided for variably displaying normal symbols by lighting and blinking of the light emitter. Further, below the normal symbol display 50, a light emitter is turned on according to the gaming state (in this embodiment, the light emitter is lighted red in the probability variation state, and the light emitter is lighted in green in the short time state, A game state lamp 51 that is turned off in a normal state is attached. Below the normal symbol display 50, a left gate having a gate switch 53a and a right gate having a gate switch 53b are provided. When the game ball is detected by the gate switch 53a or the gate switch 53b based on the game ball passing through the left gate or the right gate, the normal symbol display 50 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol. That is, the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 50 is permitted in accordance with the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 53a and the gate switch 53b. When a game ball is detected by the gate switch 53a and the gate switch 53b, a normal random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol is extracted, and a determination to hit the normal symbol is made. In some cases, the normal symbol display result on the normal symbol display 50 is a hit. Further, the normal random number per normal symbol extracted based on the fact that the game ball passes through the left gate or the right gate during the normal symbol variation and is detected by the gate switches 53a and 53b is a predetermined number (for example, Up to four), and the stored number is displayed by turning on the general-purpose memory lamp 56 composed of a plurality of (for example, four) light emitters. The general memory lamp 56 is arranged on the left side of the game area 12.

  A large winning opening 60 having an opening / closing plate 62 that opens and closes a horizontally long rectangular entrance is disposed below the electric start winning opening 46. The special winning opening 60 includes a solenoid 63 serving as an opening / closing drive source for the opening / closing plate 62 and a count sensor 64 (both are shown only with reference numerals in FIG. 25). Note that the game balls won in the big winning opening 60 are detected by the count sensor 64, and based on this detection, a predetermined number (for example, more than when the game balls are won in the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46 (for example, , 14) game balls are paid out. At the bottom of the gaming area 12 below the big winning opening 60, there is provided an out opening 48 through which the gaming balls that have flowed down the gaming area 12 and have not won any winning openings or winning devices are taken in. . Four winning openings 66a to 66d are provided on the left and right sides of the starting winning opening 45, the electric starting winning opening 46 and the large winning opening 60. It should be noted that when a game ball wins a winning opening 66a-66d, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out. In addition, an electric decoration lamp 49 (only the reference numeral is shown in FIG. 25) is attached to the gaming area 12 so that lighting and blinking are controlled according to the gaming state.

  The game realized by various winning devices provided on the game board 4 will be described. The game is launched by a launch device (not shown) provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and passes through the launch rail 15 and the guide rail 11. The game ball released to the upper part of the region 12 flows down toward the out port 48 while colliding with the obstacle nail or the like in the game region 12. When a game ball flowing down the game area 12 passes through the left gate or the right gate and is detected by the gate switches 53a and 53b, the normal symbol display 50 displays the variation of the normal symbol (the light emitters are green and red). Lit alternately). The normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 50 stops after a predetermined period of time, and when the display result of the normal symbol at the time of the stop is “winning” (the illuminator is turned off in green), the electric start winning award 46 open / close blades 47 are opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times (for example, once in 0.5 seconds in the normal state). On the other hand, when the display result of the normal symbol display 50 is “losing” (the illuminant is red and the lighting is stopped), the open / close wing 47 is not opened, so that the game ball cannot be won at the electric start winning opening 46. However, the start winning opening 45 is in a state where a game ball can be won.

  In addition, when a game ball is won at the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46 and the game ball is detected by the start opening sensor 55, the special symbol display 41 can start the variation display of the special symbol. (For example, when the game is not in a big hit game and when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are not being displayed), the special symbol display 41 starts displaying the special symbol, and the liquid crystal display 116 displays the decoration. The symbol variation display is started. If the special symbol and decorative symbol change display is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined period, and the special symbol at the time of the stop is a specific display mode (a combination of lighting of multiple light emitters that will be a big hit: jackpot symbol) The decorative symbol stop symbol (the state in which all the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped) is also in a specific display mode (the same decorative symbol combination: jackpot symbol), and the control of the “hit game state” is started. That is, the open / close plate 62 of the big prize opening 60 falls to the front side to open the entrance, and the big prize opening 60 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) has been won. To maintain Then, after the special winning opening 60 is closed by the standing of the opening / closing plate 62, a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses. A control for repeating an open / close cycle (hereinafter also referred to as a round “R”) 15 times is executed. In this way, when controlled to the big hit gaming state, the big winning opening 60 is opened, and the starting winning opening 45 or the electric starting winning opening 46 is obtained by winning the game ball in the opened big winning opening 60. Since it is possible to acquire a large amount of game balls in a shorter time than winning a game ball, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

  In this embodiment, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are controlled to stop in the order of left decorative symbol 80a → right decorative symbol 80c → middle decorative symbol 80b. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is a state in which all of the left, middle and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed by starting the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols and stopping the middle decorative symbol 80b. A combination of symbols.

  In addition, when the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a special display mode (a combination of lighting of a plurality of light emitters that are probable big hits) among the specific display modes, the decorative symbols are also displayed in a special display mode ( The combination of the same specific symbols: Probability variation jackpot symbol), after controlling to the jackpot gaming state, the probability of the next jackpot gaming state increases (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is 1/70, the probability variation state Otherwise, 1/490). That is, it becomes a more advantageous state for the player in the probability variation state. In the probability variation state, the control for increasing the probability that the result of the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 50 is “win”, and the result of the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 50 is “hit”. Control for extending the opening time of the opening and closing blades 47 opened based on the control is also performed.

  In addition, when the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a non-special display result (a combination of lighting of a plurality of illuminants that become a non-probable big hit) among the special display results among the specific display results, the decoration symbol is stopped. The symbol also becomes a non-special display result (the same non-specific symbol combination: non-probable big hit symbol), and after controlling to the big hit gaming state, the special symbol indicator 41 is used a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times). Until the special symbol variation display is executed, the control for increasing the probability that the normal symbol variation display result on the normal symbol display unit 50 is “hit”, and the normal symbol variation display result “ Time-shortening control such as extension control of the opening time of the opening / closing blade 47 that is opened based on the fact that it has been “hit” is executed. In the short time state, the probability of winning the electric start winning slot 46 increases until the special symbol display is executed a predetermined number of times by the special symbol display 41, and the number of executions of the special symbol change display in a predetermined period is increased. Can be increased, so that the player is in an advantageous state. In the probability variation state described above, in addition to the time-shortening control, the probability that the normal symbol variation display result is “hit” on the normal symbol display 50 is increased, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-shortening state. It becomes a state. The normal state is a state other than the probability fluctuation state and the short time state described above.

  FIG. 4 shows the game board 4 in a state where it is disassembled into components. However, since only the components necessary for the explanation are taken up here, the illustration of some components is omitted as appropriate.

  The effect device of the present embodiment is composed of two units that are divided forward and backward with the game board 4a interposed therebetween. Specifically, the front unit 140 is located on the front side of the game board 4a, and the front unit 140 is attached to the game board 4a from the front side. Conversely, the rear unit 142 is located on the back side of the game board 4a, and the rear unit 142 is attached to the game board 4a from the back side.

  In the game board 4a, a through hole 144 is formed by punching the plywood material in the thickness direction. The through hole 144 is greatly opened from the center of the game area 12 to a slightly higher range, and the opening shape substantially matches the outer shape of the front unit 140.

  The front unit 140 is formed in such a shape that the second half portion (connecting insertion portion) facing the game board 4a is completely fitted into the through hole 144 when viewed in the front-rear direction. This part is attached to the game board 4a in a state of being fitted in the through hole 144. In the rear half of the front unit 140, the thickness of the front half in the front-rear direction is set to be almost the same as the thickness of the game board 4a. For this reason, when the front unit 140 is attached to the game board 4a, the half part thereafter is flush with the back surface of the game board 4a (so-called flush state).

  Further, the front unit 140 is formed with a boss 140a that protrudes rearward from the second half portion (insertion connecting portion). A total of three bosses 140a are formed at the upper position of the front unit 140 and two at the lower position (only one is shown in FIG. 4), all of which are game boards through the through holes 144. When inserted from the front side of 4a, it protrudes further rearward from the back side of game board 4a.

  On the other hand, with the front unit 140 attached to the game board 4a, the front half of the front unit 140 protrudes to the front side of the game board 4a. The thickness of the front half portion is set to be substantially the same as that of the guide rail 11 or the like, for example. For this reason, when the front unit 140 is attached to the game board 4a, the front half of the front unit 140 projects forward from the board surface in the game area 12, thereby guiding and guiding the flow of the game ball.

  On the other hand, the rear unit 142 on the back side is formed in a substantially flat front surface facing the back surface of the game board 4a, and is attached to the game board 4a with the flat front surface as an attachment surface 142a. When the rear unit 142 is attached to the game board 4a, the attachment surface 142a is in close contact with the back surface of the game board 4a (however, a gap due to manufacturing error or distortion is allowed).

  Further, although the mounting surface 142a is not fitted into the through hole 144, a part of the mounting surface 142a faces the through hole 144. That is, when the rear unit 142 is attached to the game board 4 a, the attachment surface 142 a partially projects inside the through hole 144 and is exposed to the front side of the game board 4 a through the through hole 144. However, since this exposed part is covered with the front unit 140, it is not directly visible to the player.

  Further, the rear unit 142 has three boss holes 142b corresponding to the bosses 140a of the front unit 140. When the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are attached to the game board 4a from the front and rear, 3 The bosses 140a reach the rear unit 142 through the through holes 144 and are inserted into the corresponding boss holes 142b. In this state, the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are positioned relative to each other.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, a display unit is further attached to the game board 4 from behind the rear unit 142. The display unit is configured as a unit in which the liquid crystal display 116 and the second illumination control board 113 (only the reference numeral is shown in FIG. 25) are integrated, and plays a role of displaying a stunning image on the screen. . When the game board 4 is completed, the screen of the display unit can be viewed from the front side through the through hole 144.

  FIG. 5 shows the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 connected to each other. The front unit 140 plays a role of giving a player a certain visual effect / impact from modeling / decoration applied to the outer surface thereof. In addition, such modeling / decoration of the front unit 140 is coupled with the design of the decorative sheet (cell board) affixed to the front surface of the game board 4a so that the player can clearly recognize the model and game concept of the pachinko machine 1. There is an effect. At the same time, in the present embodiment, the front unit 140 is attached to a substantially central position of the game area 12, so that an effect area in which an effect operation is performed is formed. In the present embodiment, in this effect area, for example, a light emission effect by lighting / flashing of an LED, an image display effect by a liquid crystal display, an operation effect by a movable accessory, and the like are performed.

  Further, the central portion of the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 is opened in a rectangular shape so that the display unit can be visually recognized. Therefore, the display area 42 is formed in the opening portion. In the display area 42, an effect is displayed by displaying an effect image on the liquid crystal display 116.

  The overall appearance of the front unit 140 is formed with a “monster house” as a motif. The “monster house” here is a building where the characters (comic characters imitating imaginary monsters) that appear in the story of creation are the residence, and the appearance is Western-style brick It has become. When the front unit 140 is regarded as a “monster house”, the roof decoration portion 140b corresponding to the roof has a shape that widens toward the left and right. In addition, the roof decoration portion 140b serves to distribute the game balls flowing down from above the game area 12 to the left and right (so-called armor cover).

  A comical character body (monster) 140c is arranged immediately below the roof decoration portion 140b on the left side. The character body (monster) 140c corresponds to the character who becomes the master of the “monster house” in the above story, and is visually designed to imitate a human boy. In terms of design, this character body (monster) 140c looks like a wall that penetrates from the attic and looks into both face and both hands.

  Further, the center of the roof decoration portion 140b swells in a dome roof shape, and a window decoration portion 140d imitating a “roof window” is disposed immediately below the roof decoration portion 140b. The window decoration portion 140d can be easily recognized as a window in appearance by adopting transparent parts. Further, an LED 140l is mounted on an LED board (not shown) at the back of the window decoration part 140d. Therefore, the window decoration part 140d performs a light emission effect by turning on and blinking the LED 140l. The LED board is built in the front unit 140. In the present embodiment, the window decoration portion 140d and the LED 140l function as an effect lamp 44a (see FIG. 3).

  Another spherical guiding member 140e is attached to the front side of the window decoration portion 140d so as to obliquely close the “roof window”. The ball guiding member 140e is arranged so as to be braided together with the other decorative member 140f on the front side of the window decorative portion 140d. Each of the ball guiding member 140e and the decorative member 140f has a three-dimensional pattern with a wood grain on the front surface.

  The left and right side edges of the front unit 140 extend downward so as to surround both sides of the display area 42, and the right edge of the front unit 140 is wider than the left edge. The roof decoration portion 140b extends from the upper portion of the front unit 140 to the left and right side edges, so that the outer edges of the left and right side edges are outside the game area by the roof decoration portion 140b. 12 (not shown in FIG. 5).

  A wall decoration body 140g is attached to the right edge of the front unit 140 along the inside of the roof decoration portion 140b. Further, another wall decoration body 140h is attached to the right edge portion from the upper edge to the right edge of the display area 42, and there is a fixed space between the wall decoration body 140h and the previous wall decoration body 140g. A gap is secured. These wall decorations 140g and 140h are each formed into a shape in which bricks are stacked, and the atmosphere as a “monster house” is created by the formation of these wall decorations 140g and 140h.

  On the other hand, a window decoration portion 141 is formed on the left edge of the front unit 140 so as to be located inside the roof decoration portion 140b. The window decoration portion 141 is a decoration as a “light window” leading to the interior of the “monster house”.

  On the right edge of the front unit 140, a sphere guide passage 148 is formed in the space between the wall decorations 140g and 140h. The ball guide passage 148 extends downward from the upper side of the display area 42 so as to bypass the right side, and is opened toward the game area 12 below. During the game by the pachinko machine 1, the game ball that has flowed down from above the front unit 140 is guided by the ball guide member 140e and sent into the ball guide passage 148.

  A wall surface member 140 i is attached to the right edge of the front unit 140 at a position behind the ball guide passage 148 as viewed from the front side. The wall member 140i is light transmissive by employing transparent parts (plate-like members), and an LED 140m is mounted on an LED substrate (not shown) at a position behind the wall member 140i. For this reason, in the ball guide passage 148, a light emission effect by lighting / flashing of the LED 140m is performed similarly to the window decoration portion 140d described above. In the present embodiment, the wall surface member 140i and the LED 140m function as an effect lamp 44b (see FIG. 3).

  Although not shown in detail in FIG. 5, the wall surface member 140i has a light diffusion lens cut (for example, prism cut, diamond cut, etc.) on the back surface thereof. On the other hand, the front surface of the wall surface member 140i is processed into a shape having visual uniformity with the surface shape of the wall decorations 140g and 140h. Specifically, since the wall decorations 140g and 140h have a shape in which bricks are stacked, protrusions simulating each brick are also formed on the front surface of the wall surface member 140i.

  The shape, function, and the like of the ball guide passage 148 will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  A ball receiving stage 140j is formed at the lower edge of the front unit 140. In the present embodiment, not only the front unit 140 but also a ball receiving stage 142c is formed at the lower edge of the rear unit 142, and both the ball receiving stages are combined in a state where the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are combined. 140j and 142c are integrated. The ball receiving stages 140j, 142c are divided into upper, middle, and lower three stages. Of these, the upper and middle ball receiving stages 142c are formed in the rear unit 142, and the lower ball receiving stage 140j is formed in the front unit 140. Yes. Among these, the upper ball receiving stage 142c is located at the innermost position, and the position is lowered in this order from the middle ball receiving stage 142c to the lower ball receiving stage 140j.

  In relation to the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j, the rear unit 142 is formed with a guide passage 142d. The guide passage 142d is lowered from the center position of the upper and middle ball receiving stages 142c, and to the front side. It bends and extends. Further, the front unit 140 is formed with a discharge port 140k of the guide passage 142d at the center position of the lower edge thereof.

  The functions of the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j and the guide passage 142d are substantially the same as those known. That is, the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j roll the game ball so as to swing left and right on the upper surface thereof, and the destination of the game ball cannot be predicted. In this process, the game ball falls to the lower stage or is inserted into the guide passage 142d, so that the game is interesting by the movement of the game ball in the meantime. When the game ball is inserted into the guide passage 142d, it is released directly from the lower discharge port 140k, so that it becomes easy to win the start winning port 45 and the electric start winning port 46 (see FIG. 3).

  Although not shown in detail in FIG. 5, a warp passage is formed in the front unit 140 in relation to the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j. The warp passages are respectively formed on the left and right side edges of the front unit 140, and both play a role of guiding the game ball to the ball receiving stage 142c. In this embodiment, the form and arrangement of the warp passage are different on the left and right, and the specific form, arrangement, etc. will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  FIG. 6 shows the outer shape of the rear unit 142 in detail. Unlike the front unit 140, most of the rear unit 142 is hidden behind the game board 4a. However, since the part of the ball receiving stage 142c and the part surrounding the display area 42 are exposed to the front side and directly touch the player's eyes, there are decorations similar to the front unit 140. Has been.

  First, a decoration member 142e is disposed above and above the upper ball receiving stage 142c, and this decoration member 142e extends to the left and right so as to define the lower edge of the display area 42. . In addition, the decorative member 142e is formed into a shape in which bricks are arranged in a horizontal row, so that the decoration and the visual unity of the front unit 140 are maintained. The decorative member 142e is divided into left and right portions with the guide passage 142d.

  In addition, a decoration member 142f is also disposed on the left portion of the upper edge of the display area 42. The decorative member 142f is also formed into a shape in which bricks are arranged in a horizontal row when viewed from the front, but is further formed into a shape in which bricks are arranged in the depth direction.

  With respect to the other periphery of the display area 42, the same decoration (decoration simulating the arrangement of bricks) is applied to the right position of the decoration member 142f, and the same decoration is applied to the right edge. ing. On the other hand, the left edge of the display area 42 is slightly different from the others and is decorated like a wooden door. Such a decoration of the rear unit 142 is not so conspicuous because it is located just behind the front unit 140 when viewed from the front, but the player changes the direction and angle of the line of sight to change the display area 42. If the periphery is looked into, the decoration of the rear unit 142 is clearly visible. The decoration of the rear unit 142 will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  Next, an operation mechanism that is a central element in the rear unit 142 will be described.

  As shown by a broken line in FIG. 6, the rear unit 142 has built-in performance action bodies that can appear and disappear in the display area 42, that is, character bodies 150, 152, and 154. These character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are accommodated in the periphery of the display area 42 in a state of being located at the back (inside of the rear unit 142) from the above-described attachment surface 142a. It moves from the position toward the display area 42 and appears on the front side of the display screen.

  The rear unit 142 is provided with three cover members 142g at positions corresponding to the mounting surface 142a. The cover member 142g is made of a transparent (or translucent) resin plate having a thin wall thickness (for example, about 2 mm), and the mounting surface 142a is configured from the front surface of these cover members 142g. In FIG. 6, the outer shapes of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are indicated by broken lines. However, since the cover member 142g has transparency, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 (and their attached mechanisms) are actually used. It is visible through the front side.

  FIG. 7 shows a state where the cover member 142 g is removed from the rear unit 142. The three character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are arranged so as to surround the display area 42, and one character body 150, 152, and 154 are positioned above, on the right side, and on the left side, respectively.

  Each of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 is designed in a different form. These character bodies 150, 152, and 154 all resemble some kind of “monster” appearing in a famous mysterious novel, but are visually designed to be deformed. That is, the character body (Franken) 150 located on the right side of the display area 42 is imitating a “Frankenstein monster”, but the expression feels as if it is missing somewhere. The character body (Dracula) 152 located above the display area 42 is similar to the “Vampire Dracula”, but has an impression that it seems somewhat weak from the face. The character body 154 located on the left side of the display area 42 is similar to a “wolf man (man who transforms from a human figure into a wolf)”. Although not shown in detail in FIG. 7, the expression of the character body (wolf man) 154 is mascot-like caress.

  The rear unit 142 is formed with accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160 (standby accommodating portions) corresponding to the three character bodies 150, 152, and 154, respectively. The rear unit 142 has a structure that is entirely covered with the casing 162, and the three accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160 are in a state of being partitioned and formed inside the casing 162.

  The casing 162 has a substantially rectangular outer shape. The front surface of the casing 162 is largely open, but the back surface is closed by a back wall 162a. The outer edge of the casing 162 is surrounded by a side wall 162b, and the side wall 162b is formed so as to rise from the peripheral edge of the back wall 162a to the front surface side. And said accommodating part 156,158,160 is formed inside the side wall 162b in the space before this back wall 162a.

  In the accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160, the side ends adjacent to the display area 42 are the entrances and exits of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154. The character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be displaced between a state (standby position) accommodated in the accommodation units 156, 158, and 160 and a state (appearance position) that appears on the front side of the display screen. At this time, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 enter and exit through the entrances and exits.

  The rear unit 142 is attached to the back side of the game board 4a, and the front unit 140 is attached to the front side thereof, so that the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are accommodated in the accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160, respectively. When it is in the state, it is hidden behind the front unit 140 and the game board 4a and is not visible from the front.

  Further, in the present embodiment, shielding members 164, 166, 168 are provided corresponding to the character bodies 150, 152, 154, and these shielding members 164, 166, 168 are accommodated through the display area 42 from the front side. 156, 158, 160 plays the role of blocking the exposure of the inside. Therefore, as indicated by the solid line in FIG. 7, when the character bodies 150, 152, 154 are accommodated in the accommodating portions 156, 158, 160, they are accommodated by the corresponding shielding members 164, 166, 168, respectively. The entrances and exits of the portions 156, 158, and 160 are closed.

  On the other hand, as indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. Can be opened. In this state, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can appear on the front side of the display area 42.

  At this time, with respect to the character bodies 150 and 152 on the right side and the upper side of the display area 42, the respective shielding members 164 and 166 are rotated about the one end portion along the front surface of the display screen, thereby opening the entrance. Further, with respect to the character body 154 on the left side of the display area 42, the entrance / exit is opened by the shielding member 168 pivoting toward the display screen about the vertical axis.

  In addition, the shielding members 164, 166, and 168 are provided with a decoration that is consistent with the decoration on the outer surface of the front unit 140. For example, the shielding members 164 and 166 positioned on the right side and the upper side of the display area 42 are decorated in the same manner as the decorative member 142f, in the form of a brick arrangement. On the other hand, the shielding member 168 located on the left side of the display area 42 is decorated like a wooden door as described above.

  In the present embodiment, the three character bodies 150, 152, and 154 perform the appearing and appearing operations in the display area 42. However, the respective operation ranges are designed not to interfere with each other, or in control. An operation that does not interfere is performed. For example, the character body (wolf man) 154 on the left side of the display area 42 moves linearly to the right from the left end of the display area 42, but the motion range A1 at this time is the other two character bodies. It is designed not to overlap with the operation range A2 of 150 and 152.

  Regarding the character bodies 150 and 152 located on the right side and the upper side of the display area 42, there is a design overlap in the operation range in which the respective shielding members 164 and 166 rotate. However, these character bodies 150 and 152 are controlled so that their movement ranges (angles) B1 and B2 do not interfere with each other during actual movement.

  Next, the details of the operation mechanism for operating the character bodies 150, 152, 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, 168 will be described.

  FIG. 8 specifically shows an operation mechanism for the character body (franken) 150 and the shielding member 164. The motion mechanism including the character body (franken) 150 and the shielding member 164 is unitized in a state of being housed in a box-shaped mechanism box 150a. The mechanism box 150a is accommodated in the rear unit 142 as a whole unit, and the accommodation portion 156 is formed inside the mechanism box 150a in this state.

  The character body (Franken) 150 is composed of a combination of three movable parts, and specifically includes a head part 150b, a left arm part 150c, and a right arm part 150d. These parts 150b, 150c, and 150d are pin-bonded to each other to form a link mechanism, and each corresponds to a section of the link mechanism. In addition, an elevating slider 150e is accommodated in the mechanism box 150a, and this elevating slider 150e also constitutes one action mechanism together with the character body (franken) 150. The elevating slider 150e is supported so as to be movable up and down in the mechanism box 150a.

  The head part 150b of the character body (Franken) 150 is supported by the mechanism box 150a via a fulcrum 150f at a portion corresponding to the chest of the “monster”. A lever 150g extends obliquely downward from this portion, and the head part 150b and the lift slider 150e are joined to each other via the lever 150g.

  The left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d of the character body (Franken) 150 are connected to each other at a portion corresponding to the base of the arm. The left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d operate as a unit on the mechanism without relatively moving. However, the head part 150b is located between the right arm part 150d and the left arm part 150c when viewed in the front-rear direction, and these are housed in the mechanism box 150a so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, an appropriate clearance is secured between the head part 150b, the left arm part 150c, and the right arm part 150d. Accordingly, in this embodiment, the character body (Franken) 150 has a thickness as a whole (which is structurally different from a movable accessory having only one thin plate).

  Although not shown in FIG. 8, the head part 150 b is pin-bonded to the left arm part 150 c and the right arm part 150 d at a portion corresponding to the back of the “monster”. On the other hand, the right arm part 150d is pin-bonded to the shielding member 164 at a portion corresponding to the palm. As a result, a continuous mechanism from the elevating slider 150e to the shielding member 164 via the head part 150b and the right arm part 150d is configured. As a result, the character body (Franken) 150 as a whole has a thickness as well as a two-dimensional visual effect due to a single action, like a movable object having only one thin plate. A visual effect is obtained as if the body (Franken) 150 is displayed three-dimensionally and the image displayed in the display area 42 on the rear side of the character body (Franken) 150 is also given depth.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, a drive motor 150h is attached to the back side of the mechanism box 150a. The character body (franken) 150 and the shielding member 164 can operate using the drive motor 150h as a drive source.

  In the mechanism box 150a, an open hole 150j is formed in the right side wall 150i as seen in FIG. The opening hole 150j opens the space inside the mechanism box 150a to the right side, and can ensure the visibility to the inside. In addition, since the casing 162 of the rear unit 142 is also formed as a whole from transparent resin, even if the mechanism box 152a is housed in the casing 162, the inside thereof can be visually recognized through the opening hole 150j. Yes.

  FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 show an operation example of the character body (franken) 150 and the shielding member 164. The lifting slider 150e is lifted and lowered by power from the driving motor 150h, and the power from the driving motor 150h is transmitted to the lifting slider 150e via a rack and pinion mechanism.

  The raising / lowering operation of the raising / lowering slider 150e is transmitted to the head part 150b via the lever 150g. When the elevating slider 150e is raised, the lever 150g is pulled up accordingly, and thereby the head part 150b rotates around the fulcrum 150f. By the rotation of the head part 150b at this time, a movement in which the character body (Franken) 150, which is just a “monster”, protrudes the head forward is realized. As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, an engaging groove 150k is formed at the lower end of the elevating slider 150e, and the elevating slider 150e and the head part 150b are connected via the engaging groove 150k. It is joined.

  When the head part 150b is further rotated, the movement is transmitted to the left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d, and the movement is transmitted to the shielding member 164 with the right arm part 150d as a connecting node. As a result, the shielding member 164 is displaced obliquely from the initial posture (hanging state), so that an operation as if the shielding member 164 was pushed up in the upper left direction is realized. At this time, the left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d work as articulated nodes having no fixed fulcrum, so that the left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d move in the upper left direction according to the movement of the shielding member 164 and the head part 150b. Become.

  As a result, when the motion mechanism is viewed as a whole, the character body (Franken) 150, which is a “monster”, pushes the shielding member 164 with both hands, and a staging operation is realized as if the face protrudes from that. become. In addition, since the shielding member 164 is decorated to resemble a brick wall, the “monster” has its monster power from the movement of the character body (Franken) 150 at this time, and the “monster house” A visual effect is obtained as if the brick wall was forcibly pushed up.

  FIG. 11 specifically shows an operation mechanism for the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member 166. The motion mechanism including the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member 166 is also unitized in a state of being housed in a box-shaped mechanism box 152a. Here, similarly, the mechanism box 152a is accommodated in the rear unit 142 as a whole unit, and the accommodating portion 158 is formed inside the mechanism box 152a in this state.

  The character body (Dracula) 152 is a single component, and a two-system link mechanism is provided in the mechanism box 152a. Of these, one system is for rotating (or swinging) the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member 166 as a whole, and the other system is for the character body (Dracula) 152 to be the longitudinal length of the shielding member 166. It is intended to slide in the direction.

  Of the two systems of link mechanisms, the first one system (second link mechanism) includes a main part 152b formed integrally with the shielding member 166, and a character body together with the main part 152b (swing member). A lever 152c for rotating (or swinging) the (dracula) 152 is included. The main part 152b is supported by the mechanism box 152a via a fulcrum 152d, and can swing in the left-right direction around the fulcrum 152d.

  One lever 152c is swingably supported by the mechanism box 152a via a fulcrum 152e. The end of the lever 152c located on the lower side from the fulcrum 152e is joined to the main part 152b. A guide groove 152i is formed at the end of the lever 152c along the longitudinal direction thereof. On the other hand, the main part 152b is provided with an engagement pin (not shown) that protrudes rearward in the front-rear direction. ing. The main part 152b is mechanically connected to the lever 152c by inserting the engaging pin into the guide groove 152i.

  A guide groove 152f is formed along the longitudinal direction on the opposite side, that is, on the end portion located on the upper side from the fulcrum 152e, and the tip of the crank 152g is inserted into the guide groove 152f. . The crank 152g is connected to the output shaft of the drive motor 152h, and can be rotated or rotated by its power.

  The remaining one system (first link mechanism) includes a connecting rod 153a connected to the character body (Dracula) 152 and a lever 153b connected to the connecting rod 153a. The character body (Dracula) 152 is designed in a posture as if “Vampire Dracula” is flying in the sky, and the connecting rod 153a is pinned backward in the flight direction of the character body (Dracula) 152. It is joined.

  On the other hand, the character body (Dracula) 152 is slidably supported with respect to another main part 152b. For this reason, a guide groove 153c is formed along the longitudinal direction of the main part 152b. An engagement pin (not shown) is formed behind the character body (Dracula) 152 when viewed from the front side, and this engagement pin is in a state of being inserted into the guide groove 153c.

  The lever 153b is also formed with a guide groove 153d along the longitudinal direction thereof, and the tip of the crank 153e is inserted into the guide groove 153d. The crank 153e is connected to the output shaft of the drive motor 153f, and can be rotated or rotated by its power.

  As for the character body (Dracula) 152, the entire mechanism box 152a is formed of transparent parts. For this reason, the two-link mechanism has an advantage that the state can be easily confirmed from various directions around the link mechanism.

  FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 show an operation example of the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member 166. First, for one system of link mechanism (second link mechanism), when the crank 152g is rotated in one direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 12) by the power of the drive motor 152h, this causes the lever 152c to move in one direction. It rotates in the clockwise direction in FIG. When the lever 152c is rotated, the main part 152b is thereby rotated in one direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 12). Then, the right end part) rotates downward.

  For the remaining one-system link mechanism (first link mechanism), when the crank 153e is rotated in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 12) by the power of the drive motor 153f, the lever 153b is It rotates in a direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 12). When the lever 153b is rotated, the connecting rod 153a is pushed in one direction (left direction in FIG. 12), so that the character body (Dracula) 152 is moved along the main part 152b in the tip direction (in FIG. 12). Will slide to the lower left).

  As a result, when the action mechanism is viewed as a whole, the character body (Dracula) 152 as “Vampire Dracula” appears together with the shielding member 166 so as to hang down from the back of the ceiling of the “Monster House” and floats in the air as it is. A directing operation as if it were. Since the image of “Vampire Dracula = Bat” is generally established, the aspect in which the character body (Dracula) 152 imitating “Vampire Dracula” appears from the ceiling as in this embodiment is It is easy for everyone to accept it.

  As is clear from the above description, of the two types of link mechanisms, the link mechanism (first link mechanism) for sliding the character body (Dracula) 152 is a mechanism element including the drive motor 153f. It is understood that the whole is mounted on a separate link mechanism (second link mechanism). Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a character body (dracula) 152 is positioned at the left end with the fulcrum 152d of the main part 152b as the center, and a drive motor 153h is positioned at the right end on the opposite side. . For this reason, when the main part 152b swings, the character body (dracula) 152 and the drive motor 153h are balanced in balance, and the stable swing is realized. In particular, the mass of the drive motor 153h also acts as a counterweight when the character body 152 attempts to return from the state in which the character body 152 is displaced downward, so that excessive torque is required to swing the main part 152b. There is an advantage of not.

  FIG. 14 specifically shows an operation mechanism for the character body (wolf man) 154 and the shielding member 168. Similarly to the above, the operation mechanism including the character body (wolf man) 154 and the shielding member 168 is also unitized in a state of being housed in the box-shaped mechanism box 154a. The mechanism box 154a is accommodated in the rear unit 142 as a whole unit, and the accommodation portion 160 is formed inside the mechanism box 154a in this state.

  The character body (wolf man) 154 is composed of a combination of two movable parts, and specifically includes a main body part 154b and a left arm part 154c. In the mechanism box 154a, a slide block 154d and a push / pull rod 154e are disposed as other mechanism elements. Of these, the slide block 154d extends vertically in the mechanism box 154a, and upper and lower ends thereof are supported so as to be slidable in the lateral direction with respect to the mechanism box 154a. Correspondingly, two guide grooves 154f are formed in the mechanism box 154a, and these guide grooves 154f extend in the lateral direction while being kept parallel to each other.

  One push / pull rod 154e extends in the horizontal direction (rightward in FIG. 14) with the base end fixed to the slide block 154d, and the tip of the push / pull rod 154e reaches slightly outside the mechanism box 154a.

  The main body part 54b of the character body (wolf man) 154 is fixed to one side end (right side end in FIG. 14) of the slide block 154d. Therefore, the movement of the character body (wolf man) 154 in the lateral direction is basically realized by the sliding motion of the slide block 154d. On the other hand, the left arm part 154c is in a state where the left arm part 154c is pin-bonded to the main body part 154b and moves relative to the main body part 154b.

  Further, the upper and lower ends of the shielding member 168 are rotatably supported by the mechanism box 154a. As already explained, the shielding member 168 is decorated like a wooden door, and its movement is the same as that when opening and closing the door. Two engaging pieces 168a and 168b for engaging with the push / pull rod 154e are formed at the upper end of the shielding member 168. The engaging pieces 168a and 168b are formed by the decorative member 142f. It is located above. The engagement pieces 168a and 168b extend in the horizontal direction from the rotation shaft of the shielding member 168. When the mechanism box 154a is viewed from directly above, the two engagement pieces 168a and 168b are opened in a V shape. Are arranged.

  On the other hand, engagement protrusions 154g and 154h are formed at the tip end portion (right end portion in FIG. 14) of the push / pull rod 154e corresponding to the engagement pieces 168a and 168b. As shown in FIG. 14, in a state where the character body (wolf man) 154 is housed in the housing portion 160, two engagement protrusions 154g and 154h are provided between the two engagement pieces 168a and 168b. Both are located. In this state, the engaging protrusion 154h located on the inner side of the accommodating portion 160 (leftward in FIG. 14) abuts on the engaging piece 168b of the shielding member 168, thereby holding the posture of the shielding member 168. At this time, the shielding member 168 is in a state in which the entrance / exit of the housing portion 160 is closed, thereby hiding the presence of the character body (wolf man) 154 located in the housing portion 160.

  In the mechanism box 154a, an open hole 154j is formed in the left side wall 154i as viewed in FIG. The opening hole 154j can open the space inside the mechanism box 154a to the left side and ensure the visibility to the inside.

  FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 show an operation example of the character body (wolf man) 154 and the shielding member 168. The slide block 154d is slid by power from the drive motor 155, and the power from the drive motor 155 is transmitted to the slide block 154d via the crank 155a and the lever 155b. Therefore, the lower end portion of the lever 155b is pin-joined to the mechanism box 154a, while the upper end portion of the lever 155b is slider-joined to the slide block 154d. A guide groove 155c extending in the vertical direction is formed in the slide block 154d, and a pin 155d that fits into the guide groove 155c is formed at the upper end portion of the corresponding lever 155b. The lever 155b is also formed with a guide groove 155e along its longitudinal direction, and the leading end of the crank 155a is inserted into the guide groove 155e.

  Therefore, when the crank 155a is rotated in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 15A) by the power of the drive motor 155, the lever 155e is thereby moved in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 15A). Rotate. When the lever 155e rotates, the slide block 154d is pushed in one direction (rightward in FIG. 15A), and as a result, the character body (wolf man) 154 is moved outwardly from the inside of the housing portion 160 (FIG. 15 (a) will slide to the right).

  In conjunction with such sliding of the slide block 154d, the push / pull rod 154e also slides in one direction (rightward in FIG. 15A). Then, the engaging protrusion 154g located at the head in the sliding direction pushes the engaging piece 168a of the shielding member 168, and thereby the shielding member 168 is rotated around the axis.

  The main body part 154b of the character body (wolf man) 154 simply slides in one direction (rightward in FIG. 15A) in accordance with the slide operation of the slide block 154d, but the left arm part 154c slides. The movement that rotates with the movement is added.

  For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 15B, a lever 155f is attached to the back of the left arm part 154c, and this lever 155f extends from the tip of the left arm part 154c to the rear of the main body part 154b. It extends and is joined to the mechanism box 154a by a slider. A guide groove 155g is further formed in the mechanism box 154a, and a slide pin 155h that fits into the guide groove 155g is provided at one end of the lever 155f. The guide groove 155g extends horizontally from one side end (left side end in FIG. 15A) toward the other side end in the mechanism box 154a, and is bent obliquely upward in the middle. Therefore, in a state where the character body (wolf man) 154 and the shielding member 168 are housed in the housing portion 160 (FIG. 14), the slide block 154d slides in one direction (rightward in FIG. 15A). When the operation starts, the slide pin 155h of the lever 155f does not appear to be displaced in the vertical direction at the beginning, but when the slide operation of the slide block 154d reaches the final stage, the slide pin 155h guides to the bent portion of the guide groove 155g. It is gradually displaced upward. Thereby, the movement of turning so that the tip of the lever 155f, that is, the tip of the left arm part 154c is lowered, is realized.

  Looking at the above movement as a whole of the motion mechanism, the character body (wolf man) 154 that is a “monster” vigorously pushes open the shielding member 168 that is a “wooden door” and suddenly jumps out of the room. Operation will be realized. On the contrary, when the character body (Dracula) 152 is retracted into the room, the shielding member 168 which is a “wooden door” is closed accordingly, and a natural rendering operation as if the room was shielded is realized.

  In this embodiment, the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are driven and controlled so that the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are not visible to the player, and the appearance position is visible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be visually recognized by the player and the stand-by positions that are not visible to the player by controlling the solenoid. You may comprise so that a reciprocating drive may be carried out between positions. Moreover, not only reciprocal driving but also rotational driving may be used. In other words, the driving means and the driving method are not limited as long as the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be moved in and out of the standby position where the player cannot visually recognize the character body 150, 152 and 154.

  FIG. 17 shows a left half ((a) in the drawing) and a right half ((b) in the drawing) in a state where the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are combined. As shown in FIG. 17, when the operation mechanism of the rear unit 142 is in an inoperative state, a character body (wolf man) 154 is formed on the left side of the display area 42 by a shielding member 168 that imitates a “wooden door”. And other operating mechanisms are obscured. On the right side of the display area 42, the character body (Franken) 150 and other motion mechanisms are obscured by a shielding member 164 simulating a “brick wall”. These shielding members 164 and 166 are visually unified in outer surface shape with the outer surface shapes such as the window decoration portion 141 and the wall decoration body 140h of the front unit 140. , 152 is not reminiscent of the existence of any of them, and there is almost no awareness of any device there.

  FIG. 18 shows the entirety of the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 as viewed from a slightly upward angle in a combined state. As shown in FIG. 18, when the operation mechanism of the rear unit 142 is in an inoperative state, a character body (dracula) 152 is provided above the display area 42 by a shielding member 166 simulating a “brick ceiling”. And other operating mechanisms are obscured. Similarly, since the outer surface shape of the shielding member 166 is visually unified with the outer surface shape of the wall decoration 140h of the front unit 140, the player is hardly aware of the existence of the operation mechanism. ing.

  FIG. 19 shows a longitudinal section in the front half of the front unit 140. A portion of the front unit 140 that protrudes from the front surface (board surface) of the game board 4a to the front side includes the roof decoration portion 40b, the ball guide member 140e, the wall decorations 140g and 140h, and the like.

  In FIG. 19, the shape of the sphere guide passage 148 is shown in more detail. In other words, the ball guide passage 148 has an entrance that opens obliquely upward to the left above the front unit 140, and the game ball that has jumped in from there is first guided by the ball guide member 140e and rolls in the lower right direction. To do. As shown in the cross section of FIG. 19, the ball guide member 140e has a cross-sectional shape that is stepped downward along the rolling direction of the game ball, and therefore, the game ball on the ball guide member 140e. Is guided, the rolling speed is first relaxed on the stepped uneven surface.

  On one decorative member 140f, a braking protrusion 141a is formed so as to face the uneven surface of the ball guiding member 140e. The braking protrusion 141a is in a positional relationship where it collides with a game ball rolling on the uneven surface of the ball guiding member 140e in such a manner as to hit it. For this reason, the game ball that has entered the ball guiding passage 148 first collides with the braking protrusion 141a and is decelerated.

  Similarly, a braking protrusion 141b is also formed on the wall decoration body 140g, and when proceeding further from the previous braking protrusion section 141a to the back of the ball guide passage 148, this time, the braking protrusion section 141b of the wall decoration body 140g will play a game. The balls collide relative to each other, and the rolling speed is also reduced here.

  Thereafter, when the game ball further advances in the ball guide passage 148, the game ball rolls while contacting the outer surfaces of the two wall decorations 140g and 140h, and the rolling speed is appropriately reduced in the process. . Further, in the present embodiment, since the uneven surface is also provided on the front surface of the wall surface member 140i, the game ball is not only caused by friction with the uneven surface of the wall surface member 140i as well as the two outer surfaces of the wall decoration bodies 140g and 140h. The braking force is also applied. As a result, an appropriate braking force acts on the rolling of the game ball in the ball guide passage 148, and the player can follow the rolling process with his eyes.

  At the right edge of the front unit 140, the warp passage extends obliquely downward to the left through the inside of the front unit 140 (inside the outer surface). A warp inlet 148a is formed at the lower end portion of the ball guide passage 148 so as to open to the wall surface member 140i, and a game ball rolling on the ball guide passage 148 enters the warp passage from the warp inlet 148a. There is.

  Further, a discharge approach 148b is formed on the right edge of the front unit 140, and this discharge approach 148b protrudes from the exit of the warp passage toward the ball receiving stage 142c (not shown in FIG. 19). . The game ball that has passed through the warp passage is discharged to the ball receiving stage 142c through the discharge approach 148b.

  Here, a see-through hole 148c is formed in the wall surface member 140i of the front unit 140, and the see-through hole 148c penetrates the wall surface member 140i in the thickness direction. For this reason, the appearance (part) of the game ball passing through the warp passage is visible to the player through the see-through hole 148c.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the decorative shape of the wall surface member 140i (a shape in which bricks are stacked), see-through holes 148c are formed just at the positions of the gaps between the individual bricks. For this reason, in this embodiment, even if the inside of the warp passage can be visually recognized from the front side by forming the see-through hole 148c, the decorative shape of the front unit 140 is not hindered thereby. Benefits arise.

  In the present embodiment, the gate switch 53 is disposed in the game area 12, but the gate switch 170 may be integrally attached to the left and right side edges of the front unit 140 as shown in FIG. In this case, the gate switch 170 is disposed inside the left and right roof decoration portions 140b. Therefore, a passage guide passage 170a communicating with the gate switch 170 is formed in the roof decoration portion 140b.

  FIG. 20 shows a state where the game ball passes through the right gate switch 170 as an example. Usually, since the gate switch 170 is hidden behind the roof decoration part 140b, it is not visually recognized from the front side. However, the through hole 170b is formed in the roof decoration portion 140b, and the player can partially see the appearance of the game ball passing through the gate switch 170 through the through hole 170b. As a result, it is clear to the player that the normal symbol determination is firmly performed in the pachinko machine 1, so there is no possibility that the player will be suspicious about the presence or absence of the normal symbol determination. Although not shown here, a similar through hole is formed in the left gate switch.

  FIG. 21 shows a cross section of the left edge portion of the front unit 140. Similarly, the gate switch 170 and the passage guide passage 170a are formed inside the roof decoration portion 140b for the left edge portion. Although not shown, a through-hole is formed in the roof decoration portion 140b also on the left edge, so that the state of the game ball passing through the gate switch 170 is visible to the player. A warp passage 172 extending in the vertical direction is formed at the left edge of the front unit 140. The warp passage 172 has a warp inlet 172a at a relatively high position. That is, the warp inlet 172a is formed to open from the roof decoration portion 140b to the upper left, and the game ball that has entered from here rolls as it is to the back side of the roof decoration portion 140b. Although not shown in FIG. 21, a through hole (similar to the passage guide passage 70a) is formed in the roof decoration portion 140b in the vicinity of the warp inlet 172a, so that the game ball is inserted into the warp inlet 172a. The process of rolling forward from there is visible to the player through the through hole.

  Further, when the warp passage 172 is bent from the back side to the back side of the roof decoration portion 140b, the warp passage 172 is bent downward from the roof decoration portion 140b to extend the back side position of the window decoration portion 141 downward. In addition, the warp passage 172 is bent rightward to reach the vicinity of the boundary with the display region 42, and further bent further to the rear side to receive the ball receiving stage 142c (shown in FIG. 21) of the rear unit 142. Not open).

  In this embodiment, a transparent plate (outer surface member) is employed in a portion corresponding to the window glass of the window decoration portion 141, and thereby, a decorative effect that actually imitates a “light window” in the window decoration portion 141. Is emphasized. Further, the transparent plate of the window decoration portion 141 is provided with a semi-permeable film by, for example, aluminum vapor deposition, and the transparent plate of the window decoration portion 141 functions as a so-called magic mirror by the semi-permeable film processing. It has become. Therefore, the window decoration portion 141 does not simply show through the back side, and the one behind it (the rear unit 142 or the character body (wolf man) 154) due to the difference in light reflectance between the front side and the back side. Existence is shielded.

  Therefore, even if the game ball flows down behind the window decoration portion 141 in the process of passing the game ball through the warp passage 172, the state of the game ball is not clearly seen through, but the game ball is played by the semipermeable membrane. Is projected on the front side. For this reason, the player does not see the warp passage 172, the rear unit 142, the character body (wolf man) 154, etc. behind the window decoration portion 141, and the game ball passes through the warp passage 172. Is visible by its contour (projection).

  FIG. 22 shows an overlapping relationship between the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142. Here, in particular, the cover member 142g located on the right side portion of the rear unit 142 will be described.

  As described above, since the rear unit 142 is attached to the game board 4a (not shown in FIG. 22) in a state of being superimposed behind the front unit 140, the cover member 142g is directly visible from the front side. It will never be done. However, at the right edge portion of the front unit 140, the boundary line with the display region 42 is not a straight line due to the shape of the wall decoration body 140h, but has a complicated shape designed in a decorative manner. For this reason, if one side edge part (end edge part which prescribes | regulates the boundary with the display area 42) is made into a linear shape, 142 g of cover members will mutually shape when the front unit 140 is piled up on the front side. No longer match.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the shape of the one side edge portion of the cover member 142g viewed from the front side and the outer shape of the front unit 140 (the outer shape of the wall decoration body 140h) are mutually matched, so that the cover member 142g is viewed from the front side. Is prevented from being noticed unnaturally.

  FIG. 23 shows the motion mechanism of the character body (Franken) 150 as seen from above. As described above, the character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member 164 enter and exit in the lateral direction (indicated by a double-headed arrow W in the drawing) with respect to the housing portion 156, and therefore, one side end of the mechanism box 150a (see FIG. 23 is the entrance / exit of the accommodating portion 156.

  The cover member 142g is attached so as to close the front opening of the mechanism box 150a. Therefore, when the shielding member 164 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 156, the shielding member 164 is attached to the cover member 142g when viewed from the front side. Covered. At this time, the cover member 142g also functions as a partition that partitions the periphery of the entrance / exit of the housing portion 156.

  On the other hand, one end edge portion (left end edge portion in FIG. 23) of the cover member 142g is formed in an irregular curved shape in accordance with the wall decoration 140h of the front unit 140 as described above (FIG. 23), the outer periphery of the entrance / exit of the accommodating portion 156 is partially cut away in the entering direction (right direction in FIG. 23).

  Further, in this embodiment, a notch 156a is formed in the mechanism box 150a around the periphery of the entrance / exit of the accommodating portion 156, and the notch 156a is U-shaped in the entry direction (rightward in FIG. 23) from the opening end of the entrance / exit. It extends in a letter shape (refer to (b) in FIG. 8 as appropriate).

  Accordingly, even when the shielding member 164 is housed in the housing portion 156, the shielding member 164 can be gripped from both sides through the notch portion of the cover member 142g and the notch portion 156a of the mechanism box 150a. (The white arrow in FIG. 23). Therefore, even if some trouble occurs in the operation mechanism, the inside of the housing portion 156 can be easily opened by grasping and pulling out the shielding member 164, so that the maintenance and inspection work can be performed quickly and easily. Can be done.

  The above-described configuration of the notch is a suitable example related to maintenance / inspection of the operating mechanism. In addition, the present embodiment has a configuration for smoothing normal movement by the operating mechanism.

  As shown in FIG. 23, a chamfered portion 156b is formed at one side edge (the right edge in FIG. 23) of the cover member 142g. The chamfered portion 156b forms an inclined surface that guides the character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member 164 in the entering direction (right direction in FIG. 23), whereby the character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member are formed. The operation of 164 (especially the operation when entering the accommodating portion 156) is performed smoothly.

  Although not specifically shown here, the configuration of the chamfered portion is also applied to the accommodating portions 158 and 160 of the other character bodies 152 and 154.

  FIG. 24 shows the lower edge portion of the front unit 140 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 24 (a), two light emitting regions 174 are formed on both sides of the emission port 140k in the lower edge of the front unit 140. In these light emitting regions 174, two light emitting regions 174 are formed. The LED 176 shown in (b) of FIG. 24 is turned on / flashed. In the present embodiment, these four light emitting areas 174 and LEDs 176 function as the special symbol display 41 (see FIG. 3).

  For example, if there is a start prize during a normal game (not in a big hit game) in the pachinko machine 1, a special symbol change display will be triggered by that and the judgment result (winning result) will be displayed specially. The symbol is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the change display and the stop display at this time are represented by lighting / flashing of the four light emitting areas 174. For example, during the variable display, the light emitting area 174 repeatedly blinks in a certain pattern, and when the fluctuation is stopped, the four light emitting areas 174 are turned on or off to display the determination result. Various patterns can be considered for the display mode, but here, when the determination result is a hit (big hit), all the four light emitting areas 174 are turned on, and any of the cases where the determination is not satisfied (1 to 4). Is turned off.

  Further, below the left and right light emitting areas 174, four lighting areas 178 for performing start hold display are formed. In these lighting regions 178, lighting is performed by the light of the LED 182 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, these four lighting areas 178 and the LED 182 function as the special figure storage lamp 54 (see FIG. 3).

  As shown in FIG. 24B, a light guiding member 180 is attached to the lower edge portion of the front unit 140 on the back side of the outer surface of the front unit 140. Arranged behind the guide member 180. The LED 176 is mounted on an LED board (not shown), and an LED 182 for starting hold display is also mounted on the same LED board.

  The light guide member 180 has a certain depth when viewed from the front side, and the LED substrate is positioned rearward by the depth of the light guide member 180. The light guiding member 180 is formed with four light guiding paths 180a penetrating the inside thereof in the front-rear direction, and these light guiding paths 180a are formed corresponding to the four LEDs 176, respectively. The light guiding path 180a is opened at the front surface of the light guiding member 180 and communicates directly behind the light emitting region 174.

  The light emitted from the individual LEDs 176 is guided forward through the light guide path 180 a and is irradiated to the front side through the light emitting region 174. A transparent member is fitted in the light emitting area 174, and as a result, the light emitting area 174 is visually recognized as if it is surface emitting as a whole.

  In the present embodiment, since the light guiding member 180 is molded from a dark color resin material, the inner wall of the light guiding path 180a exhibits a relatively high light shielding property, whereby the light from the LED 176 passes from the light guiding path 180a to the surroundings. It is hard to leak. For this reason, since the player can visually recognize that only the light emitting area 174 is clearly lit and blinking, the player can clearly recognize the variation display and stop display modes of the special symbol. There is an advantage.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the shape of the outline of the light emitting region 174 is formed as a decorative shape that imitates a symbol (for example, a symbol representing a figure in which a bat flies). For this reason, lighting / flashing of the light emitting area 174 is difficult to be recognized as a simple point light emitting operation, and it is possible to suggest (or teach, appeal, announce, etc.) to the player that some meaning is included therein. .

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. First, the main substrate 100 and the peripheral substrate 110 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing the main board 100 and the peripheral board 110.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the main board 100 includes a main control board 101 and a payout control board 102. The main control board 101 includes a CPU 101a as a central processing unit, a ROM 101b as a read-only memory, and a RAM 101c as a readable / writable memory. The CPU 101a controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a game control program stored in the ROM 101b, and creates a command signal to be transmitted to the peripheral board 110 and the payout control board 102. The RAM 101c temporarily stores various data generated in various processes executed by the main control board 101 and information such as input signals. Note that detection signals from the gate switches 53a and 53b, the start port sensor 55, the count sensor 64, and the like are input to the main control board 101, and the CPU 101a executes processing according to these input detection signals. That is, based on the input detection signal, a drive signal is output to the solenoid 63, the special symbol display 41, the normal symbol display 50, the special symbol storage lamp 54, the general symbol storage lamp 56, and the like. Although not shown, the CPU 101a also outputs a drive signal for the probability variation state lamp 51 described above. Specifically, when a probability change state flag, which will be described later, is set, a drive signal is output to the probability variation state lamp 51 so as to be lit and the probability variation state lamp 51 is reset based on the reset of the probability variation state flag. A drive signal is output to turn off the light.

  The payout control board 102 includes a CPU 102a as a central processing unit, a ROM 102b as a read-only memory, and a RAM 102c as a readable / writable memory. When a detection signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by the start port sensor 55, the count sensor 64, or the like is input to the main control board 101, the game ball is paid out from the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101. An instructing command signal is transmitted. The payout control board 102 processes the command signal received from the main control board 101 and outputs a drive signal to the payout device 103 (payout motor). Thereby, the payout device 103 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal.

  The payout control board 102 is also connected to a launching device 104 having a launching motor that launches a game ball toward the game area 12. Then, based on the operation handle 18 being operated, the launch motor 135 drives the launch motor to launch a game ball. The operation handle 18 has a built-in touch sensor that detects whether or not the player is in contact. The operation handle 18 is operated while detecting that the player is in contact with the touch sensor. Thus, the firing motor 104 can be driven by the firing device 104. Further, an upper pan full switch for detecting that the upper pan 28 is full is provided, and when the detection signal from the upper pan full switch is input, the operation handle 18 cannot be accepted. Control may be performed so that the launching motor 104 cannot drive the firing motor. In this case, it may be controlled so that the operation of the operation handle 18 can be accepted when the detection signal from the upper pan full tank switch is not input.

  The peripheral board 110 includes a sub-integrated board 111, a first lighting control board 112 (described as lighting control board 1 in FIG. 25), and a second lighting control board 113 (showing lighting control board 2 in FIG. 25). And a waveform control board 114. The sub integrated substrate 111 includes a CPU 111a, a ROM 111b, and a RAM 111c. The CPU 111a processes the command signal received from the main control board 101 according to the effect control program stored in the ROM 111b. The RAM 111c temporarily stores information such as various data and input / output signals generated in various processes executed by the sub-integrated board 111. Then, the sub-integrated board 111 processes the command signal received from the main control board 101 and transmits the command signal to the second electrical decoration control board 113, or the side decorative body 33, the first electrical decoration control board 112, and A drive signal is output to the waveform control board 114.

  The first electrical control board 112 and the waveform control board 114 include ROMs 112b and 114b as read-only memories and RAMs 112c and 114c as read / write memories, respectively. The second electrical decoration control board 113 includes a CPU 113a as a central processing unit, a ROM 113b as a read-only memory, and a ROM 113c as a readable / writable memory. The first electrical decoration control board 112 sends drive signals to the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, the effect lamp 44, and the decoration lamp 49 based on the drive signal input from the sub-integrated board 111 a predetermined number of times. Output. The second electrical decoration control board 113 controls the liquid crystal display 116 based on the command signal from the sub integrated board 111. The waveform control board 114 controls the sound wave device 115 (the bass speaker 14 and the speaker 36) based on the command signal from the sub-integrated board 111.

  Next, various control processes executed in accordance with the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 31 and FIGS. 73 to 75. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed on the main control board. FIG. 27 is a table showing random numbers updated on the main control board. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing special symbol processing executed on the main control board. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a big hit determination process as a subroutine of the special symbol variation process. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a variation display pattern setting process which is a subroutine of the special symbol variation process. FIG. 31 is a table showing the variation display patterns selected on the main control board. FIG. 73 is a table for determining the big hit variation display pattern. FIG. 74 is a table for determining a reach deviation variation display pattern. FIG. 75 is a table for determining a deviation variation display pattern. These processes show a part of the processes executed by CPU 101a mounted on main control board 101 at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms) according to the game control program stored in ROM 101b. It is a thing.

  In the start winning process shown in FIG. 26, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46 (step S1). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the start port sensor 55. If a detection signal is output from the start port sensor 55, it is determined that a prize has been won (YES). If the detection signal from is not output, it is determined that no winning is made (NO). When it is determined that a game ball has won the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved ball number counter provided in the RAM 101c is smaller than 4, which is the upper limit value. (Step S2). If the reserved ball number counter is less than the upper limit value (YES), the reserved memory storage process is executed (step S3). In the on-hold storage storing process, a process of adding “1” to the on-hold ball number counter, and display data is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 111 along with the addition of the on-hold ball number counter to turn on the special figure storage lamp 54 ( A process of changing the number of lamps to be lit up and various random numbers (for example, a jackpot determination random number, a probability variation determination random number, a reach determination random number, a variation display pattern random number, etc. described later) are acquired, and the acquired random number value is stored in the RAM 101c. A process of storing in the storage area of the provided start winning memory corresponding to the count value of the held ball counter is performed. If a game ball has not won in the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46 in step S1, or if the number of held balls is greater than or equal to the upper limit in step S2, the start is performed without executing the following processing. The winning process is terminated.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 27, various random numbers updated at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms) by the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101 include a jackpot determination random number, a probability variation determination random number, There are reach determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, and the like. The big hit determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (big hit determination). When it is determined that the big hit gaming state is generated in the big hit determination, the probability variation determination random number is changed to a probability fluctuation state after the big hit gaming state is finished based on whether or not it matches a determination value set in a probability variation determination table described later. It is a random number for determining whether or not the probability variation big hit to be controlled is determined (probability variation determination). The reach determination random number is a random number for determining (reach determination) whether or not to make a detachment with a reach mode when it is determined that the big hit gaming state is not generated in the big hit determination. The variation display pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol and the decorative symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41. Note that the random numbers updated on the main control board 101 are not limited to those described above, and the normal symbol per-determination random number and the big hit determination random number for determining whether or not the display result of the normal symbol is a hit are updated. There is also a random number or the like for determining an initial value of a jackpot determination random number that starts counting when the counter makes one round.

  In the special symbol process shown in FIG. 28, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved ball number counter is 0 (step S11). When the value of the reserved ball number counter is 0, it is determined that the jackpot determination random number is not stored in the RAM 101c, that is, the condition for starting the variable symbol display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is not satisfied, and will be described later. The process proceeds to step S15. On the other hand, if the value of the reserved ball number counter is not 0, it is determined that the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is satisfied, and the variable symbol display of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is started. It is determined whether or not the game is possible, that is, whether the game is not in the big hit game, and whether the special symbol and the decorative symbol are not being displayed (step S12). When it is not possible to start the variable display of the special symbol (decorated symbol), the process proceeds to step S15.

  When it is possible to start the special symbol (decorative symbol) variation display in step S12, a hold memory transfer process is executed (step S13). In the hold memory transfer process, a process of subtracting 1 from the hold ball number counter, and various random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) saved in the save area corresponding to 0 of the hold memory counter among the save areas of the start winning memory provided in the RAM 101c. And the like, and a process of shifting various random numbers stored in the save area of the start winning memory. That is, various random numbers stored in the storage area corresponding to n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4) of the reserved ball number counter in the storage area of the start winning memory are stored in the storage area of the start winning memory. The counter is stored in a storage area corresponding to n-1 (n = 0, 1, 2, 3).

  Thereafter, special symbol variation processing (step S14), special symbol variation processing (step S15), information output processing (step S16), and jackpot game processing (step S17) are sequentially executed. In the special symbol variation process (step S14), a jackpot determination process and a variation display pattern setting process, which will be described later, are performed, and variation control of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started based on the variation display pattern determined in the variation display pattern setting process. Then, the process of setting the fluctuation time to the fluctuation timer is performed. In the special symbol variation processing (step S15), when the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display 41 is started, the variation time set in the variation timer is monitored, and the variation set in the variation timer is monitored. When the time elapses (the variation timer expires), a process of stopping (determining) the variation display of the specific symbol and the decorative symbol is performed. In the information output process (step S16), a drive signal related to the special symbol variation display determined in the special symbol variation process (step S14) and the special symbol variation process (step S15) is output to the special symbol display 41. Then, a process of transmitting various information related to the decorative symbol variation display to the sub-integrated board 111 is performed. In the big hit game process (step S17), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag, which will be described later, is in an ON state. Then, the control of the big hit gaming state, that is, the control for opening the special winning opening 61 a predetermined number of times is performed.

  In the big hit determination process shown in FIG. 29, first, it is determined whether or not a probability variation state flag set in step S37 described later is in an ON state (step S31). If the probability variation status flag is ON, a probability variation big hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S32). If the probability variation status flag is not ON (if OFF), the non-probability variation big hit determination table is selected. (Not shown) is selected (step S33). In the probability change big hit determination table, 14 determination values among 980 big hit determination random numbers from 0 to 979 are set, and the big hit probability, which is the probability of a big hit, is 1/70. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot determination table, two determination values are set out of 980 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 979, and the jackpot probability is 1/490.

  Then, the judgment value set in the probability change jackpot determination table selected in Steps S32 and S33 or the normal time jackpot judgment table matches the jackpot determination random number read in the hold storage transition process in Step S13. Whether or not to make a big hit is determined depending on whether or not to do (step S34). The decision value set in the probability change jackpot determination table selected in Steps S32 and S33 or the normal time jackpot determination table matches the value of the jackpot determination random number read in the hold storage migration process in Step S13. When it is determined that a big hit is made based on the above, after the big hit flag is turned on (step S35), it is determined whether or not the probability big hit is made based on a probability change determination table (not shown) in which predetermined determination values are set. (Step S36). Specifically, whether or not to make a probable big hit based on whether or not the value of the probability variation determination random number read in the hold storage transition process in step S13 matches the determination value set in the probability variation determination table. judge. In this embodiment, the probability variation intrusion rate (the proportion of the big hits as the probability variation big hit) is 2/3, that is, six decision values among nine probability variation determination random numbers from 0 to 8. Is set in the probability variation determination table.

  If it is determined in step S36 that the determination value set in the probability variation determination table and the value of the probability variation determination random number read in the hold storage shift processing in step S13 match, the probability variation state is determined. If it is determined that the flag is in the ON state (however, if the probability variation state flag is already in the ON state, the ON state is continued) (step S37), and that the big hit is not the probability variation big hit (non-probability variable big hit) The probability change state flag is set to the OFF state (however, if the probability change state flag is already OFF, the OFF state is continued) (step S38). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S34 that a big hit is not made (defeated), the process is terminated without executing the following process. Note that the ON / OFF states of the big hit flag and the probability variation state flag are stored in the RAM 101c. In addition, a value of “0” is set when the big hit flag and the probability change state flag are OFF, and a value of “1” is set when the big hit flag and the probability change state flag are ON.

  In the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 30, first, as a result of the current variable display, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made, that is, whether or not the big hit flag set in step S36 of the big hit determination process is ON. It discriminate | determines (step S41). If the big hit flag is ON, a value of “1” is set to the fluctuation display flag mf (step S42). The variation display flag mf is a flag for determining a variation display pattern table. When the variation display flag mf is “1”, the big hit variation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 is set, and when it is “2”, FIG. The reach variation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 7 is set. When “3”, the deviation variation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75 is set. In step S42, a big hit variation display pattern determination table is set. At this time, the top address (address of determination value 0) of the big hit variation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 is set.

  The big hit variation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 is set in association with a determination value and a variation number of a variation display pattern to be described later. There are 100 judgment values from 0 to 99. The jackpot variation display derivation ratio can be obtained from the determination value and the variation number of the variation display pattern. The “big hit fluctuation display derivation ratio” is a ratio at which one fluctuation display pattern is derived from a plurality of fluctuation display patterns at the time of big hit. For example, as shown in FIG. 73, determination values 41 to 50 (10 in total) are associated with the variation number 20 of the variation display pattern. The jackpot variation display derivation ratio of variation number 20 of this variation display pattern is 10/100. The reach deviation variation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 74 is set in association with the determination value and the variation number of the variation display pattern. From this judgment value and the variation number of the variation display pattern, the reach deviation variation display derivation ratio can be obtained. This “reach deviation variation display derivation ratio” is a ratio at which one variation display pattern is derived from a plurality of variation display patterns at the time of reach deviation. The deviation variation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75 is set in association with the determination value and the variation number of the variation display pattern. A deviation display derivation ratio can be obtained by deviating from the judgment value and the change number of the change display pattern. The “outlier variation display derivation ratio” is a ratio at which one variation display pattern is derived from a plurality of variation display patterns at the time of deviation.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not in the ON state in Step S41 (if it is in the OFF state), the determination value set in the reach determination table in which the predetermined determination value is set and the hold memory transfer process in Step S13 are read. Whether or not to reach is determined by whether or not the value of the reach determination random number matches (step S44). In the reach determination table, the reach probability (the ratio of the reach mode) is 1 / 12.5, that is, two determination values out of 25 reach determination random numbers from 0 to 24 are reach determination. Set in the table.

  When it is determined in step S44 that the reach mode is set, the value “2” is set in the fluctuation display flag mf, that is, the reach deviation fluctuation display pattern determination table is set (step S45). At this time, the start address (address of determination value 0) of the reach deviation variation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 74 is set. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S44 that the reach mode is not selected, a value of “3” is set in the fluctuation display flag mf, that is, a deviation fluctuation display pattern determination table is set (step S46). At this time, the head address (address of determination value 0) of the deviation variation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75 is set. Then, the variable display pattern random number read out in the reserved memory transfer process in step S13 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 28 is added as an offset value to the top address of the various variable display pattern determination tables set in steps S42, 45, and 46. Then, the variable display pattern corresponding to the added address is determined (step S43). For example, when the top address of the big hit variation display pattern determination table is set in step S42, the variation display pattern random number read in the hold storage shift processing in step S13 is added to the head address as an offset value, and the addition is performed. The variation number of the variation display pattern corresponding to the address is determined. Specifically, when the read variation display pattern random number is 35, the variation display pattern random number 35 is added as an offset value to the start address (address of the judgment value 0) of the jackpot variation display pattern determination table shown in FIG. The variation number of the variation display pattern corresponding to the added address (determination value 35) is determined. Here, the variation number 18 of the variation display pattern corresponding to the determination value 35 is determined.

  In this way, the start address of various change display pattern determination tables is set according to the value of the change flag mf, the dynamic display pattern random number is added to the start address as an offset value, and the change corresponding to the added address is made. Determine the variation number of the display pattern. Therefore, even if it branches to steps S42, 45, and 46, the process can be shared by the variation flag mf, and the process can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit variation display pattern determination table, the reach deviation variation display pattern determination table, and the loss variation display pattern determination table are the same type tables having 100 determination values. The big hit variation display pattern determination table, the reach deviation variation display pattern determination table, and the loss variation display pattern determination table may be set so that becomes the greatest common divisor. At this time, the range of determination values in other various display patterns determining tables in which the range of determination values is not the greatest common divisor is an integral multiple. Therefore, as in the case of determining the variation display pattern in the same type of table, when the head address of either the big hit variation display pattern determination table, the reach variation variation display pattern determination table or the variation variation display pattern determination table is set. Then, a variable display pattern random number that is a predetermined integer multiple is added as an offset value to the head address, and the variable display pattern corresponding to the added address can be determined. For example, the determination value range in the big hit variation display pattern determination table is “200”, the determination value range in the reach deviation variation display pattern determination table is “100”, and the determination value range in the deviation variation display pattern determination table is “300”. Is set to 100, the greatest common divisor is “100”, and when the top address of the big hit variation display pattern determination table is set, the number obtained by “doubling” the variation display pattern random number as the offset value is set to the top address. It is possible to add and determine the variation display pattern corresponding to the added address. As a result, it is possible to set the jackpot fluctuation display derivation ratio, the reach deviation fluctuation display derivation ratio, and the deviation fluctuation display derivation ratio in various ways, but the jackpot fluctuation display pattern determination table, the reach deviation deviation display pattern determination table and the deviation The number of variable display patterns in the variable display pattern determination table cannot exceed the greatest common divisor.

  Further, in this embodiment, by determining any one of the variable display patterns set in the reach deviation variable display pattern determination table in step S45, a super reach effect and a super reach development effect described later are used. For example, a random number for determining whether to perform reach production such as super reach production or super reach development production is provided, and this random number is used for super reach production or super reach production. When it is decided to perform reach effects such as development effects, the variable display pattern table in which the variable display patterns for performing these reach effects are selected is selected, and the variable display pattern table and the variable display pattern random number are selected. Any one of the variable display patterns may be determined based on the above.

  Next, the variable display pattern command is set as a display command for designating the variable display pattern determined in step S43 (step S47). By setting the variable display pattern command in step S47, it is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 111 in the information output process (step S16). Further, when the variable display pattern command is output to the sub-integrated board 111 in the information output process (step S16), a drive signal is output to the special symbol display 41 to start the special symbol variable display. The sub-integrated board 111 executes a symbol setting process (step S102) and a notice selection process (step S103), which will be described later, based on the fact that the variable display pattern has been received. Information indicating the result (for example, the type of notice effect, the type of variable display pattern, the stop symbol) is transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 and the command is received by the second electrical control board 113 In addition, the CPU 113a performs control to start the decorative symbol variation display.

  Although not shown, when the variable display pattern is determined in step S43, a process of setting a variable time set according to the determined variable display pattern in a variable timer provided in the RAM 101c mounted on the main control board 101. Is also done. The variation timer starts when a variation pattern command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 111 in the information output process (step S16), and the special symbol display unit when the variation timer times out in the special symbol variation processing (step S15). A driving signal is output to 41 to stop the special symbol variation display, and a display command is sent to the sub-integrated board 111 to instruct the decorative symbol variation display stop. Note that the sub-integrated board 111 transmits the display command to the second electrical control board 113 based on the reception of the display command instructing to stop the decorative display of the decorative symbols, and the second electrical control board 113. When the display command is received, the CPU 113a controls to stop and display the decorative symbol.

  Further, the CPU 101a checks whether or not the probability variation state flag is set (step S48). When the probability variation state flag is set, the CPU 101a sub-integrates the probability variation big hit command, which is a display command indicating that the probability variation big hit is set. It transmits to the board | substrate 111 (step S49). As a result, it is possible to make the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 recognize that it is a probable big hit.

  The variable display pattern selected in steps S42, 45, and 46 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the display command is 2-byte data transmitted from the main control board 101 to the sub-integrated board 111, and the special symbol display 41 starts the special symbol variation display after starting the special symbol display. Includes data for specifying the variation time and reach production until the variation display is stopped (from the start of the variation display of the decoration symbol in the display area 42 until the variation display of the decoration symbol is stopped). It is.

  However, the display command is basically an effect in which the notice effect is determined by the sub-integrated board 111 and does not include data related to the notice effect, but the notice effect is specified only when the spotlight notice is performed. Data to be included. That is, only the spotlight notice in the notice effect is determined by the main control board 101. Note that the spotlight notice may not be determined by the main control board 101 but may be determined by the sub-integrated board 111, for example, by setting it in the lightning notice table as one of the lightning notice patterns described later.

  In addition, the display device is provided with a plurality of display areas, the symbols are variably displayed in each display area, and the display is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode when it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination process described above. In the case of having a plurality of lines, a state in which a symbol that has not been stopped on any display line stops at a predetermined symbol, and the symbol that is stopped and displayed on the display line becomes a specific display mode, or A state in which all the symbols are synchronously variably displayed in a combination such that all the symbols are in a specific display mode on any one of the display lines is called a reach mode. In this embodiment, there is only one display line, and the combination of any two of the left, middle and right decorative symbols displayed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 is the same. A state in which the symbols are stopped and the remaining decorative symbols are variably displayed, or all the decorative symbols displayed in the display area 42 are variably displayed in synchronization with the same symbol combination (for example, The state in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are always variably displayed in synchronism with each other is referred to as a reach mode. After the reach mode, the effect lamps 44a and 44b and the liquid crystal display 116 are displayed. An effect executed by the sound wave device 115 or the like (for example, the effect lamps 44a and 44b are turned on and blinking in a predetermined manner, a predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 116, and a predetermined sound output is output on the sound wave device 115). That switch production.

  Further, in this embodiment, the variation display on the special symbol display 41 is stopped and displayed simultaneously after a predetermined period corresponding to the variation display pattern. That is, the reach pattern is not formed in the special symbol display 41. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is referred to as a reach mode, it indicates that the decorative design of the display area 42 has reached the reach mode. Further, the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101 displays the decoration symbol of the display area 42 when the big hit determination random number does not become a win value in the big hit determination process described above when the special symbol variation display is started. A process (reach determination process) for determining whether or not the reach mode is set is executed. A variation display pattern corresponding to the determination result is selected, and a display command (variation display pattern command) indicating the variation display pattern is transmitted to the sub-integrated substrate 111.

  Note that the “normal fluctuation” of the fluctuation number 1 is a fluctuation display pattern without a reach mode. The “shortened variation” of variation number 2 is a variation display pattern that does not involve a reach mode, as in “normal variation”, and is a variation display pattern in which the variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shorter than “normal variation”. . The “normal reach” of the variation numbers 3 and 4 is a variation display pattern that does not perform reach effects such as a super reach effect and a super reach development effect after the reach aspect is formed.

  Further, “wolf man reach” with variation numbers 5 and 6, “Dracula reach” with variation numbers 11 and 12, and “Franken reach” with variation numbers 17 and 18 are defined after each reach mode has been formed. Fluctuating display for performing a super reach effect executed by image display control (for example, in “Wolf Man Reach”, an effect executed by image display control in which a wolf man in the form of a human being is good at cooking a decorative design) It is a pattern. Further, “wolf man reach development” of variation numbers 7 and 8, “dracula reach development” of variation numbers 13 and 14, and “franken reach development” of variation numbers 17 and 18 are executed by image display control of each character. After the super-reach production is performed, in the super-reach development production (for example, “Wolf man reach development”), the wolf man transformed from a human figure to a wolf, and a wolf man in the form of a wolf. However, it is a variable display pattern in which image display is controlled by continuing the effect of dynamically cooking decorative symbols with special dishes.

  “Wolf man reach-monster” with variation numbers 9 and 10, “Dracula reach-monster” with variation numbers 15 and 16, and “Franken reach-monster” with variation numbers 21 and 22 Unlike the super reach development effect corresponding to these characters, the super reach development effect executed by the image display control of the character image 70 imitating a monster is performed after performing the super reach effect executed by the image display control of This is a variable display pattern that is performed continuously.

  In addition, the “spotlight notice” of the variable numbers 23 to 31 is a super-reach effect after performing a notice effect for notifying that a super-reach development effect corresponding to each character is performed before the reach mode is formed. This is a variable display pattern for performing a super reach development effect corresponding to a character whose image display is controlled by a notice effect without executing the. Further, the “actual reach” of the variation numbers 32 and 33 means that the character bodies 150, 152, 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, 168 incorporated in the rear unit 142 described above after the reach form is formed. It is a change display pattern which performs reach production by driving control.

  The “full rotation reach” of the fluctuation number 34 is a fluctuation display pattern that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes a win value in the big hit determination process described later. -A variable display pattern that displays the decorative patterns on the middle and right in a synchronized manner with the same combination of symbols, and produces a stop effect display with either one of the probable big hit symbol or the non-probable big hit symbol. It is. The “super-reach branch premier” of the variation number 35 is a variation display pattern that can be executed only when the jackpot determination random number becomes a winning value in the jackpot determination process described later. Is a variable display pattern for deriving which super reach effect (or super reach development effect) is performed among a plurality of types of super reach effects in a manner different from the super reach branch effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, there is a variable display pattern that can be selected in accordance with the determination result of the jackpot determination process and the reach determination process described above (one of the jackpots, the detachment with the reach mode, or the detachment without the reach mode). A plurality of set variation display pattern tables (not shown) are set. For example, all random numbers are assigned to the variable number 1 in the table selected when the above-described time-shortening control is not executed from the variation display pattern table at the time of loss, which is selected when the loss is not accompanied by the reach mode. All random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation number 2 in the table selected when the time-shortening control is executed among the deviation fluctuation display pattern tables. The CPU 101a selects the variable display pattern table corresponding to the determination result of the big hit determination process and the reach determination process in steps S42, 45, and 46 of the variable display pattern setting process, and one variable display random number is allocated. The variable display pattern is determined in step S43. Note that the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 31, 34, and 35 are variation display patterns that can be selected only when the determination result of the big hit determination is a big hit. When an effect is performed according to these variation display patterns, Since the player can grasp that the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes a jackpot symbol (the jackpot is confirmed), it is possible to improve the player's interest when these variation display patterns are executed.

  Next, a decorative design variably displayed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing the form of a decorative design.

  In this embodiment, ten kinds of symbols “0” to “9” are used as decorative symbols. In addition, the decorative symbol is composed of a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol, and the decorative symbol is “1”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6” shown in FIG. , “7”, “9” are specified symbols, and the three types “0”, “2”, “8” shown in FIG. 32B are non-specific symbols. It is stored in the ROM 113b of the control board 113.

  When the big hit determination random number is a winning value in the big hit determination processing described above and the probability variation determination random number is a probability variation value, that is, when the probability variation big hit is made, the CPU 113a performs the symbol setting processing (step S102). The same combination of specific symbols is selected as a stop symbol (probable variation big hit symbol) for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and the big hit determination random number is a hit value in the big hit determination processing described later, and the probability variation determination random number is probable. If the value is not a value, that is, if a non-probable big hit (usually big win) is used, the CPU 113a uses the symbol setting process (step S102) to stop the same non-specific symbol from left, middle and right decorative symbols (non-probable change). Selected as a jackpot symbol). The CPU 113a stops displaying the combination of the decorative symbols selected as the stopped symbols in the symbol setting process (step S102) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after executing the variable display of the decorative symbols in the display area 42.

  The ratio of the specific symbol to the total number of decorative symbols (7/10 in this example) is determined that the probability variation determination random number is a probability variation value when the jackpot determination random number is a winning value in the jackpot determination processing described later. This is different from the probability variation rush rate (2/3 in this example). That is, in this embodiment, the probability variation entry rate is two-thirds, but the decorative symbol that can be a probability variation symbol, that is, the proportion of the specific symbol is seven tenths, the proportion of the specific symbol and the probability variation There is no one-to-one correspondence with the rush rate. Thus, by making the ratio of the specific symbols displayed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 higher than the probability variation rush rate, it is possible to make it appear as if the probability variation rush rate is higher than the actual probability variation rush rate. The expectation that the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed and the probability variation jackpot is achieved can be improved. Note that the probability variation rush rate may not be 2/3, and the ratio of the specific symbol and the probability variation rush rate may be matched.

  In addition, the left and right decorative symbols are arranged in the order of “0”, “1”, “2”,. Liquid crystal with a random pattern different from the order of “0”, “1”, “2”,..., “9”. The display is changed in such a manner that it jumps around the center of the display area 42 of the display 116. Further, the color scheme of the decorative symbol is set so that the specific symbol is colored red and the non-specific symbol is colored blue, so that the player can easily identify the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol.

  Moreover, the form of the decorative design is comprised in the aspect with thickness (the inside of a number, a side part) so that various numbers can be visually recognized three-dimensionally. Hereinafter, the form of the decorative design will be described with reference to FIG. However, in the following description, without limiting to the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c, when the decorative symbols are generally described, the decorative symbols 80 are described for convenience. As shown in FIG. 32 (C), the decorative symbol 80 is a two-dimensional display of an array identification unit 121 indicating the shape of a number as sequence identification information whose sequence can be identified, and the depth of the sequence identification unit 121. And a depth display portion 122 that is a thick portion to be processed. FIG. 32C illustrates an example of a decorative design 80 that includes an array identification unit 121 that indicates the number “7” and a depth display unit 122 that forms a thick portion of the number “7”. Yes. In the array identification portion 121 (inside the number) in the decorative pattern 80, various characters such as “Wolf Man”, “Dracula”, “Franken”, “Monster-kun”, “Kyoko-chan”, and “Moon and Bat” are described. 123 is depicted. Specifically, in the specific symbol shown in FIG. 32A, “wolf man” is depicted in the decorative symbol 80 of “1”, “Franken” is depicted in the decorative symbol 80 of “3”, and “4” "December and bats" are depicted on the decorative design 80, "Dracula" is depicted on the decorative design 80 of "5", "Moon and bats" are depicted on the decorative design 80 of "6" “Monster-kun” is depicted on the decorative symbol 80 of “7”, and “Kai-chan” is depicted on the decorative symbol 80 of “9”. On the other hand, in the non-specific symbol shown in FIG. 32 (B), “month and bat” are depicted in the decorative symbols 80 of “0”, “2”, and “8”, respectively.

  In addition, a background image 124 as a decorative pattern for decorating the depth display portion 122 is depicted on the depth display portion 122 (number side surface portion) of the decorative design 80. In the background image 124, the “monster house and bat” pattern is depicted in common in all the decorative patterns 80 of “0”, “1”, “2”,. It should be noted that the depth display portion 122 which is a thick portion is a wide area so that the background image 124 (“monster house and bat” pattern) is sufficiently depicted (so that the player can recognize the background image 124). Has been taken. The color scheme of the various characters 123 and the background image 124 is the same color as the color scheme of the decorative design 80 (for example, in the case of a specific design, the color scheme of the various characters 123 and the background image 124 is based on the red color of the specific design by gradation or the like). Image display control is performed so that recognition of numbers (array identification unit 121) in the decorative design 80 is not hindered. In addition, the array identification unit 121 has a larger occupied area on the display form in the decorative design 80 than the depth display unit 122. In other words, the display surface of the numerical part constituting the decorative design 80 is larger than the display surface of the thick part. For this reason, in the visibility of the decorative design 80, the thick part (depth display part 122) does not interfere with the recognition of the numerical part (array identification part 121). In addition, the arrangement | sequence identification part 121 is not limited to the shape of a number, What kind of shape may be sufficient if it shows the shape of arrangement | sequence identification information. However, the sequence identification information here refers to information that is composed of a plurality of types of identification information and that can generally identify the sequence order. Specifically, numbers such as “0, 1, 2,...” “1, 2, 3,...”, “A, b, c,. ... Information such as English characters such as “A, I, U,...” “A, I, U,.

  Moreover, the form of the decorative design is comprised in the aspect with thickness (the inside of a number, a side part) so that various numbers can be visually recognized three-dimensionally. And the various characters (wolf man, Dracula, Franken, Monster-kun, Kai-chan) described above are described inside the numbers in the decorative design, and the background image is described on the side of the numbers. Yes. The color scheme of each character and background image is the same color as the color scheme of the decorative design (for example, in the case of a specific design, the red color based on the red color of the specific design by gradation etc.) The display of the image is controlled so that the recognition of the numbers in the decorative design is not hindered.

  Next, the flow of the notice effect and the reach effect that are performed after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in the display area 42 until all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the notice effect and the reach effect. In the notice effect and the reach effect, a character A (hereinafter referred to as a wolf man), a character B (hereinafter referred to as a Dracula), a character stored in the ROM 113b mounted on the second electrical control board 113 Image display (for example, character image 70 imitating monster-kun) using C (hereinafter referred to as Franken), character D (hereinafter referred to as Monster), and character E (hereinafter referred to as Monster-chan) Character image 71 imitating a wolf man, character image 72 imitating Dracula, character image 73 imitating Franken, character image 74 imitating Kai-chan), mini character A (hereinafter referred to as Hiroshi), mini Character B (hereinafter referred to as Hiroshi sister), Mini Character C (hereinafter referred to as “Oh”) Kami Man (Character A mentioned above), Dracula (Character B mentioned above), Franken (Character C mentioned above is a triplet), Mini Character D (hereinafter referred to as Kaiko-chan (Character E mentioned above)) ) Image display (for example, mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi, mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi sister, three-person mini character image 92 imitating Wolf Man, Dracula, Franken, and Kai-chan imitating Mini character image 93), character body 154 (member imitating wolf man (character A above)), character body 152 (member imitating Dracula (character B above)), character body 150 ( Driving Franken (member imitating the above-mentioned character C) There is a case in which control, by directing is carried out.

  In addition, the notice effect is an effect for suggesting the possibility of being in a big hit gaming state to the player, and the expectation level for the big hit game state according to the type of the notice effect to be executed (the big hit expectation degree: The ratio at which the notice effect is executed / the jackpot and the ratio at which the notice effect is executed when it is out of place are set to be different. In general, when a big hit gaming state is reached, the rate at which the notice effect is executed is controlled to be high, so that the player's expectation can be enhanced by executing the notice effect. In addition, because it is possible to grasp the jackpot expectation level according to the type of the notice effect, it is possible to increase the player's expectation when a notice effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed, and a notice effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed. It is possible to increase the player's expectation when a notice effect with a higher degree of big hit expectation is executed than when it is performed.

  Also, the notice effect in this embodiment is executed before the right decorative symbol 80c is stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol variable display is started. This increases the player's expectation until the reach form in which the right decorative design 80c is stopped at the same design as the left decorative design 80a is formed, and gives further expectation when the reach form is formed. Even if the right decorative design 80c does not stop at the same design as the left decorative design 80a, it is possible to increase the player's expectation until the notice effect is finished.

  In determining whether or not to execute the notice effect, first, it is determined whether or not the mini character notice is executed as the notice effect. The mini character notice refers to each of the above-described mini characters A to D on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative design 80a and the right decorative design 80c in the display area 42, and the left decorative design 80a and the right decorative design 80c. The display area 42 has a smaller display area than the variable display area, and is smaller than a character that is displayed as an image in the advance notice (to be described later) (small display area with respect to the display area 42). It is a production that appears as However, a wolf man (Character A), Dracula (Character B), Franken (Character C) does not appear as a single character as in the advanced notice described later, and a three-person mode combining these characters Appear in Then, one of Hiroshi (mini character A), Hiroshi sister (mini character B), three-person group (mini character C), Kai-chan (mini character D), or a combination of these mini characters is controlled by image display control. Make it appear.

  Further, it is determined whether or not the advanced notice is executed as the notice effect regardless of whether or not the above-described mini character notice is executed. The advanced notice means that each of the above-mentioned characters A to D is visually recognized by a plurality of types of characters by controlling either image display control or drive control of the character bodies 150, 152, 154. In this embodiment, it is controlled to appear in the order of wolf man → Dracula → Franken → monster. The character displayed by the image display control is controlled not to appear by the character body drive control, and the character appearing by the character body drive control is controlled not to appear by the image display control. For example, when the wolf man is displayed as an image, the character body 154 imitating the wolf man is not driven to appear after the image display of the character image 71 simulating the wolf man.

  When the above-described advanced type notice is executed, it is determined whether or not the intense heat notice is executed as the notice effect. The intense heat notice is executed as a part of the advanced notice, and any one of the characters A to D displayed as an image in the advanced notice is changed to a color scheme of clothing displayed as an image in the normal advance notice. Unlike, it is an effect that appears in the color scheme of clothing based on white. However, when a wolf man is made to appear by this intense heat advance notice, the character of the wolf man after the transformation from a human figure to a wolf figure is made to appear, instead of changing the color scheme of clothing. In this way, when the intense heat warning is executed as a part of the advanced notice, more attention is paid to the advanced notice in which the intense heat notice may be executed than just the advanced notice. Can be made. Characters with intense heat notices appear in white based clothes color schemes, unlike the color schemes of clothes displayed in normal development type notices. Any difference can be used as long as the player can clearly recognize the difference from the character mode according to the advanced notice.

  In addition, control is performed so that a character with an intense heat notice is combined with an advanced notice, that is, when a character image display determined by an intense heat notice corresponds to an image display of a character determined with an advanced notice. Even if it is determined to execute the intense heat advance notice, if there is no character corresponding to the image display of the character determined by the advanced advance notice, the character by the intense heat notice is controlled not to appear. For example, even if it is determined to display an image of Franken whose clothing color has been changed as a notice of intense heat, if it is determined to drive the character body 150 imitating Franken to appear, If it is determined that the advanced notice is to be terminated at an earlier stage than before, the Franken whose clothing color scheme has been changed will not appear on the image display.

  Further, when the above-described advanced notice is not executed, as a notice effect, a lightning flash notice, which is an image display control that displays lightning lightning (lightning) on a dark image and causes a stop display of decorative symbols to appear by lightning, is displayed. The background image (for example, the daytime background image 81 and the night background image 82 described later) displayed at the rear of the decorative pattern is changed (for example, when the daytime background image 81 is displayed in the display area 42, the nighttime image 81 is displayed at night. Any of four types of characters (wolf man, Dracula, Franken, Monster) corresponding to the background change notice, which is image display control to be changed to the background image 82), and the super reach development effect described later, or a variable display As a result, the character (Kyoko-chan) who can appear only when the above-mentioned jackpot symbol (the jackpot is confirmed) climbs up in the spotlight. Image display control at a spotlight notice, the determination of whether or not to execute any of the performing of. When these notice effects (lightning flash notice, background change notice, spotlight notice) are executed, blackout effects that display a dark image that darkens the display area 42 for a predetermined time are performed twice.

  When the above-described notice effect is not executed and when it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed after the above notice effect is executed, the reach mode (in this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 80a and the right After the decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed with the same design, the middle decorative design 80b is not stopped and displayed), and the normal reach effect is performed with the reach mode displayed. When it is determined that the super reach effect is performed after the normal reach effect is executed, first, the super reach branch effect (branch effect notice) is performed. The super reach branching effect is a character image that imitates a wolf man, a character image that imitates Dracula, a character image that imitates Franken, a character image that imitates Monster, One of the character images imitating Phantom-chan is controlled to be displayed on the portrait 90, and a super-reach effect based on the character image displayed in the final branch effect (third branch effect) In the case of the imitated character image, this is an effect of deriving a super-reach development effect of a monster-kun reach development effect to be described later, and in the case of a character image imitating Kai-chan, a full-rotation reach effect described later).

  In the case of executing the above-described super reach branch effect, it is determined whether or not a branch accessory effect notice is executed as a branch effect. The branch effect presentation notice is to drive the same character bodies 150, 152, and 154 as the character displayed by the image display control when the third branch effect is image-controlled as part of the branch effect. It is an effect that appears by control. As described above, when the branch effect announcement is executed as a part of the branch effect announcement, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are displayed rather than the branch effect announcement only by controlling the image display of the character. By controlling the driving, it is possible to pay more attention to the branch effect notice. In addition, in the branch effect notice, the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed (the reach is formed, but the middle decorative symbol 80b is not stopped and displayed), and the game is watching the decorative symbol. Although there is a possibility that the interest of the game will be reduced for the player, the execution of the branching effect effect that causes the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear in front of the display area 42 causes the user to get bored with the branching effect notice. I won't let you.

  Then, after executing the above-described super reach branch effect, the image display control of the character image 71 imitating a wolf man is executed based on the character image displayed in the final branch effect (third branch effect). The wolf man reach effect, which is an effect to be performed, the Dracula reach effect, which is the effect executed by the image display control of the character image 72 simulating Dracula, and the effect which is executed by the image display control of the character image 73 simulating Franken One of the super-reach productions is performed. In the case of a character image simulating a monster-kun, the super-reaching development effect of the monster-kun reach development effect, which is an effect executed by image display control of a character image 70 simulating a monster-kun described later, In the case of a character image that imitates, a full rotation reach effect to be described later is executed. Also, in the super reach branching effect, if the background color of the portrait 90 is red, no outlier symbol is derived in the super reach effect, and a big hit symbol is derived in the super reach effect, or will be described later. It continues until the development of super reach.

  In addition, when it is determined to execute a super reach development effect that is continuously executed from the above-described super reach effect (for example, if a wolf man reach effect is performed) Continues from the performance executed in the super reach production, and performs any one of the wolf man reach development production, the Dracula reach development production, and the Franken reach development production. Note that, in the super reach development effect, image display control of the same character as the character whose image display is controlled in the super reach effect is executed. In addition, in the super reach development effect, in addition to the effect of controlling the image display of the same character as the super reach effect, the monster-kun reach development effect is an effect executed by the image display control of the character image 70 imitating the monster. It may be done.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned spotlight notice is performed, the super reach development effect corresponding to the character whose image display is controlled by the spotlight notice (without the normal reach effect, the super reach branch effect, and the super reach effect ( For example, when monster-kun image display is controlled by spotlight notice, monster-kun reach development effect) is performed.

  In addition, after the display area 42 is darkly displayed as a blackout effect, if neither a lightning flash notice, a background change notice, or a spotlight notice is performed, the super reach branch effect is passed after a predetermined time has elapsed. In some cases, an effect that is not performed, and an accessory reach effect that is executed by controlling the above-described character bodies 150, 152, and 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, and 168 may be performed. . Note that there is a case where an accessory reach effect is also performed when the above-described advanced notice is executed.

  In addition, as a reach effect, it is an effect that is not performed when going through a normal reach effect and a super reach branch effect, and the variable display is synchronized so that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols become the same symbol In other cases, a full-reach reach effect that stops display with a big hit symbol may be performed. The full-reach reach effect uses a combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols as the stop symbol. It is a reach production that can only be performed.

  Note that the expected degree of jackpot when the above-described reach effect is executed (the ratio at which the reach effect is executed when the jackpot is reached / the ratio at which the reach effect is executed when the jackpot is lost or ) Normal Reach Production, Wolf Man Reach Production, Dracula Reach Production, Franken Reach Production, Wolf Man Reach Production Production, Dracula Reach Development Production, Franken Reach Development Production, Monster-kun Reach Development Production, Property Reach Production, Full Rotation Reach Production When the reach effect is set so as to increase in the order of and the expectation level for jackpot is high, the probability that the stop symbol becomes a jackpot symbol as a result of the reach effect increases.

  Next, various control processes executed by the sub-integrated board 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an effect control process executed on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 35 is a table showing random numbers updated by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a symbol setting process (step S102) which is a subroutine of the effect control process. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a notice selection process (step S103) which is a subroutine of the effect control process. Note that these processes show a part of the processes executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 2 ms) according to the effect control program stored in the ROM 111b. It is a thing.

  In the effect control process shown in FIG. 34, it is determined whether or not a display signal (including a display command) has been received from the main control board 101 (step S101). When receiving the display signal from the main control board 101, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 executes a command reception interrupt process, and stores the display signal in the command storage area of the RAM 111c. In addition, a reception flag indicating that a display signal has been received is set. In step S101, it is determined whether or not the reception flag is set, and it is determined that the display signal is received when the reception flag is set.

  When it is determined in step S101 that a command (display signal) has been received, symbol setting processing (step S102), notice selection processing (step S103), and sound control processing (step S104), which will be described later, are performed and lamp control is performed. Processing (step S105), symbol variation setting processing (step S106), symbol variation control processing (step S107), jackpot display processing (step S108), and sub information output processing (step S109) are sequentially executed. In the advance notice selection process (step S103), the advanced advance notice selection process, the intense heat advance notice selection process, the lightning notice advance selection process, and the mini character advance notice selection process, which will be described later, are executed, and based on the advance notice pattern determined by these processes. It is determined whether or not a notice effect is to be executed, and when a notice effect is to be executed, which notice effect (notice effect pattern) is to be executed.

  In the lamp control process (step S104), the variable display pattern specified by the variable display pattern command received from the main control board 101 (display command for instructing the variable display pattern) is selected in the notice selection process (step S103). Control data for the effect lamps 44a and 44b and the decoration lamp 49 is selected based on the notice effect that has been made. In the sound control process (step S105), the control data of the sound wave device 115 is selected at the timing when the variation display pattern command is received from the main control board 101.

  In the symbol variation setting process (step S106), the variation display pattern designated by the variation display pattern command (display command for instructing the variation display pattern) received from the main control board 101 and the notice selection process (step S103). The control data of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 is selected based on the selected notice effect, and the variation time corresponding to the variation display pattern specified by the variation display pattern command is set in the variation timer. Start the variable time timer.

  In the symbol variation control process (step S107), a process corresponding to the control data selected in the lamp control process (step S104), the sound control process (step S105), and the symbol variation setting process (step S106) is executed. Monitor the set variation timer. That is, a drive signal is output to the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, the effect lamps 44a, 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound wave device 115 at a predetermined timing based on the control data, and whether the variation timer has timed out or not. To monitor. The drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155, the effect lamps 44a and 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound wave device that are executed when a display command for instructing to stop changing the decorative symbol display is received from the main control board 101. While stopping the drive control of 115, the display command which instruct | indicates the change display stop of a decoration symbol is transmitted to the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113. FIG. The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 receives the display command for instructing to stop the display of the decorative symbols, and the symbol specified when the sub integrated substrate 111 starts the variable display ( The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol setting process (step S102), which is determined when the variable display is started.

  Further, the effect control of the notice effect based on the notice effect pattern determined in the notice selection process (step S103) is also performed in the symbol variation control process (step S107). In the jackpot display process (step S108), when the special symbol and the decorative symbol stop symbol become a jackpot symbol, the fact that it is a jackpot is displayed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116, and the effect control during the jackpot gaming state (In this embodiment, display control such as the number of rounds, drive control of drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155, effect lamps 44a and 44b, decoration lamp 49, and sound wave device 115) is performed.

  In the sub-information output process (step S109), various information related to the display of the decorative symbol change display determined in the symbol change setting process (step S106) and the notice effect display determined in the notice selection process (step S103) are displayed. The process which transmits to the board | substrate 110 (The 1st electrical decoration control board 112, the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113, the waveform control board 114) is performed. Specifically, the drive motor 150h selected based on the variable display pattern specified by the variable display pattern command received from the main control board 101 and the notice effect selected in the notice selection process (step S103), 152h, 153f, 155, effect lamps 44a, 44b, decorative lamp 49, and drive signals 150h, by transmitting drive signals to the first electrical control board 112 and the waveform control board 114 based on the control data of the sound wave device 115. Operation control of 152h, 153f, 155, lighting / flashing control of the effect lamp 44 and the decoration lamp 49, and sound control of the sound wave device 115 are performed. Furthermore, by transmitting information such as the variable display pattern, the type of notice effect, and the stop symbol to the second electrical decoration control board 113, the variable symbol display is started in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116.

  When the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 receives information such as a variable display pattern, a type of notice effect, and a stop symbol from the sub-integrated board 111, the CPU 113a displays the information in the display area 42 corresponding to the information. Then, process data describing a process of effect display control to be executed is selected, and control such as a decorative pattern and the above-described character image display is performed based on the contents described in the process data. The stop symbol information is stored in the RAM 113c, and is stored in the RAM 113c when the display command instructing the stop display of the decorative symbol change display transmitted from the main control board 101 via the sub-integrated board 111 is received. The control which stops the decoration design with the stop design which is being executed is executed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 35, as the various random numbers updated at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 2 ms) by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, a specific symbol random number and a non-specific symbol random number are used. , Out-of-band design random numbers, advanced notice pattern random numbers, intense heat notice pattern random numbers, lightning notice pattern random numbers, mini character notice pattern random numbers, sound determination random numbers, and the like. The specific symbol random number is changed when a variation display pattern command indicating a variation display pattern that is a big hit (a variation display pattern marked with “O” in the variation display pattern table shown in FIG. 31) is received. When a jackpot command is received, that is, when it is determined to be a probability variation jackpot, the probability variation jackpot symbol (combination of the same specific symbol (FIG. 32 (A))) as a decorative symbol stop symbol in the display area 42 It is a random number for determining. The non-specific symbol random number is a decoration in the display area 42 when the variable display pattern command that is a big hit is received and the probability variable big hit command is not received, that is, when it is determined to be a non-probable big hit. This is a random number for determining a non-probable big hit symbol (combination of the same non-specific symbols (Fig. 32B)) as a symbol stop symbol. Out-of-line design random numbers are out-of-line without a reach mode, and a variable display pattern that is out-of-band with a reach mode (a variable display pattern marked with “x” in the win of the variable display pattern table shown in FIG. 31). This is a random number for determining the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c as the decorative symbol stop symbol in the display area 42 when the instructed variable display pattern command is received.

  The advanced notice pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the aforementioned advanced notice and determining the advanced notice pattern. The intense heat notification pattern random number is used to determine whether or not to perform the above-described intense heat notification, and is a random number for determining the intense heat notification pattern of the intense heat notification. The lightning warning pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the lightning warning effect described above and determining the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning effect displayed in the display area 42. The mini character notice pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the above-mentioned mini character notice and determining the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice. The branch effect notice pattern random number is a random number for determining the branch effect notice pattern of the above-described super reach branch effect (branch effect notice). The branch role effect notice pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the aforementioned branch role effect notice and determining the branch feature effect notice pattern of the branch feature effect notice. The sound determination random number is a random number for determining the sound output mode during the fluctuation display.

  In the symbol setting process (step S102) shown in FIG. 36, it is determined whether or not the received display signal is a variable display pattern command (step S111). If the variable display pattern command has not been received, the process is terminated and the process returns to the main routine. If the variable display pattern command is received, it is determined whether or not the variable display pattern designated by the variable display pattern command is a variable display pattern that is a big hit (step S112). If it is a variable display pattern that is not a big hit (if it is out of reach without reach or out of reach), the left decorative design 80a, middle decorative design 80b, right as the decorative design stop symbols in the display area 42 After selecting the decorative symbols 80c (step S118), the process returns to the main routine. Here, the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c are selected so as to be different from each other when they are out of reach without the reach mode, and left decorative symbols 80a when they are out of the range with the reach mode. The right decorative design 80c is the same design, and the middle decorative design 80b is selected to be a different design from the left decorative design 80a and the right decorative design 80c.

  If the variation display pattern is a big hit in step S112, it is determined whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit (step S113). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned probability variation jackpot command is received. If the probability variation jackpot command is received, it is determined that the probability variation jackpot command is received. Determine that there is. If it is not probable big hit (if not probable big hit) in step S113, the same non-specific symbol is selected as the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c as the decorative symbol stop symbol in the display area 42. (Step S117). If it is a probable big hit, it is determined whether or not a re-lottery effect is performed (step S115). If the re-lottery effect is not performed, the process proceeds to step S116. When the re-drawing effect is performed, the same non-specific symbol is selected as the temporary decorative symbol for the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c (step S115), and the decorative symbol stop symbol in the display area 42 is selected. The same specific symbol is selected as the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c (step S116).

  The re-lottery effect means that after the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display 41 and the decorative symbol variation display on the display area 42 are started, only the decorative symbol variation display on the display area 42 is temporarily stopped. This is an effect of stopping the variable symbol display in the display area 42 when the variable symbol is displayed again and the special symbol indicator 41 on the special symbol indicator 41 is stopped. Specifically, after starting the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display 41 and the decorative symbol variation display on the display area 42, the same non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the display area 42 as a temporary stop symbol of the decoration symbol. After that, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are again displayed in a variably displayed manner, and when the special symbol display on the special symbol indicator 41 is stopped, the same specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area 42 as a decorative symbol stop symbol It is a production to make.

  In the notice selection processing (step S103) shown in FIG. 37, it is determined whether or not the received display signal is a variable display pattern (step S111). If the variable display pattern command has not been received, the process is terminated and the process returns to the main routine. If the variable display pattern command has been received, the advanced notice selection process (step S112), the intense heat notice selection process (step S113), the lightning notice selection process (step S114), and the mini character notice selection process (step S115), which will be described later. And the branching effect notice selection process (step S129) are sequentially executed, so that the advanced notice pattern, the intense heat notice pattern, the lightning notice pattern, the mini-character notice pattern, the branch effect notice pattern, and the branch character effect notice notice pattern are respectively displayed. In step S116 and subsequent steps, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a notice effect based on these notice patterns, and which notice effect (notice pattern) is to be executed when the notice effect is executed. . In the branch effect notice selection process (step S127), since the branch effect notice pattern is selected only when the branch effect notice is executed, it is determined whether to execute the branch effect notice based on the branch effect notice pattern. Instead, when the branch effect notice pattern is selected, the process is executed in the processes after step S116 based on the branch effect notice pattern.

  The advanced notice selection process (step S112) executed in the notice selection process (step S103) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the advanced notice selection process that is a subroutine of the notice selection process. FIG. 39 is a table showing the daytime background advanced notice pattern selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 40 is a table showing the night-background advanced notice pattern selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 41 is a list display diagram showing an advanced notice pattern.

  In the advanced notice selection process (step S112) shown in FIG. 38, it is determined whether or not the daytime background flag is ON (step S131). The daytime background flag is turned on when the background image in the display area 42 is the daytime background image 81, and is turned off when the background image in the display area 42 is the night background image 82. Then, the ON / OFF state of the daytime background flag is switched in lightning bolt notice selection processing (step S114) described later.

  If the day / background flag is in the ON state in step S131, the day / background development type advance notice table (FIG. 39) is selected (step S132). If the day / background flag is not in the ON state (if it is in the OFF state), The night background development type advance notice table (FIG. 40) is selected (step S133). Then, an advanced notice pattern random number is acquired, and one advanced notice pattern is determined from the developed notice pattern set in each advanced notice table based on the value of the obtained advanced notice pattern random number ( Step S134).

  Note that FIG. 39 shows a development notice table for day background, and FIG. 40 shows a development notice table for night background. In these advanced notice tables, 17 kinds of advanced notice pattern numbers 0 to 16 are prepared as the advanced notice patterns of the advanced notice effect. Further, when the advanced notice pattern No. 0 is determined among the advanced notice patterns, the advanced notice effect is not performed. In other words, in the advanced notice table, it is determined whether or not the advanced notice effect is to be executed based on the evolved notice pattern random number, and the evolved notice pattern of the developed notice effect is determined. For example, when it is determined that the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 are determined, it is decided to execute the advanced notice effect, and the determined advanced notice pattern as the evolved notice pattern of the evolved notice effect is determined. Decide on the advance notice pattern of numbers. A separate random number for determining whether or not to execute the advanced notice effect is provided, and when it is determined that the advanced notice effect is executed based on this random number, the advanced notice pattern number based on the evolved notice pattern random number is determined. You may make it determine in any one of 1-16.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the advanced notice pattern number 1 is an evolved notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying a wolf man in the display area 42 when the decorative symbol variation display is started. Pattern No. 2 is an advanced notice pattern in which the drive motor 155 is driven and controlled to start the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, and the character body 154 imitating a wolf man appears in front of the display area.

  The advanced notice pattern No. 3 is an advanced notice pattern in which a wolf man is displayed as an image in the display area 42 when a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner and a dracula is displayed after a predetermined period of time. The advance notice pattern number 4 displays the image of the wolf man in the display area 42 when starting the variable display of the decorative symbols, and controls the drive motor 152h and the drive motor 153f to drive the dracula after a predetermined period. This is an advanced notice pattern in which a stylized character body 152 appears in front of the display area to perform staged effects.

  In the advanced notice pattern number 5, the character 154 imitating a wolf man appears in the front of the display area by controlling the drive motor 155 when starting the decorative display of the decorative symbols, and after a predetermined period of time, the drive motor 152h In addition, the advance notice pattern No. 6 is an advanced notice pattern in which the character body 152 imitating a dracula is caused to appear in front of the display area by controlling the drive motor 153f to perform staged effects. The image display of the character image 71 imitating a wolf man and the image display of the character image 72 imitating a dracula are sequentially executed in the same manner as the developed notice pattern of pattern number 3, and then Franken is image-displayed after a predetermined period. This is an advanced notice pattern that provides staged effects.

  The advanced notice pattern No. 7 displays the image of Franken without executing the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man and the image display of the character image 72 imitating the Dracula when starting the variable display of the decorative symbol. The advance notice pattern No. 8 is a developed advance notice pattern that produces an effect to be displayed. Similar to the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 3, the advance notice pattern No. 8 imitates the image display of the character image 71 imitating a wolf man, Dracula. After the sequential display of the image of the character image 72, the development type of performing staged effects by causing the character body 150 imitating franken to appear in front of the display area by controlling the drive motor 150h after a predetermined period of time. It is a notice pattern.

  The advance notice pattern number 9 is the same as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 4, the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, the drive motor 152h capable of operating the character body 152 imitating the dracula and the drive An advance notice that performs stepwise effects by sequentially controlling the drive of the motor 153f and then driving the drive motor 150h to cause the character body 150 imitating a franken to appear in front of the display area after a predetermined period of time. The development type advance notice pattern number 10 is a character that imitates the drive control of the drive motor 155 that can operate the character body 154 that imitates the wolf man, and the character that imitates the dracula like the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 5. Drive motor 152h and drive motor 15 capable of operating the body 152 An advanced notice pattern in which a staged effect is produced by driving the drive motor 150h to appear in front of the display area by controlling the drive motor 150h after a predetermined period of time after sequentially executing the drive control of f. It is.

  The advanced notice pattern number 11 imitated the image display of the character image 71 imitating a wolf man, the image display of the character image 72 imitating a dracula, and the franken like the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 6. The advanced notice pattern No. 12 is an advanced notice pattern in which a step-by-step presentation is performed by displaying the image of the monster when the character image 73 is sequentially displayed after a predetermined period of time. The character image 71 imitating a wolf man as well as the character image 73 imitating Franken without executing the image display of the character image 72 imitating a dracula as well as the evolutionary notice pattern of No. 7 is displayed. After the execution, perform a staged effect by displaying the image of the monster when a predetermined period of time Is an exhibition type notice patterns.

  The advanced notice pattern number 13 displays the image of the monster when a predetermined period has elapsed after executing the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, like the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 1. The advanced notice pattern No. 14 is an image of the character image 71 that imitates a wolf man and has a dracula in the same manner as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 8. The image display of the imitated character image 72 and the drive control of the drive motor 150h capable of operating the character body 150 imitating the Franken are sequentially executed, and then a step-by-step effect is obtained by displaying the image of the monster during a predetermined period. This is an advanced notice pattern.

  The advanced notice pattern number 15 is an image display of a character image 71 imitating a wolf man, a drive motor 152h capable of operating a character body 152 imitating a dracula, and a drive, like the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 9. Development that performs stepwise effects by displaying the image of monster in a predetermined period after sequentially executing the drive control of the motor 153f and the drive control of the drive motor 150h that can operate the character body 150 imitating Franken. The advance notice pattern number 16 is the same as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 10, and the drive control of the drive motor 155 that can operate the character body 154 that imitates the wolf man, imitating the dracula. Drive motor 152h capable of operating the character body 152 After sequentially executing the drive control of the dynamic motor 153f and the drive control of the drive motor 150h that can operate the character body 150 imitating the franken, a step-by-step effect is performed by displaying an image of the monster during a predetermined period. This is an advanced notice pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the daytime background advanced notice table is acquired in step S134 described above when the display area 42 controls the display of the background image (daytime background image 81) indicating the daytime state. This is a table for determining an advanced notice pattern based on a developed notice pattern random number. In the daytime background development type advance notice table, the values of the developed type advance notice pattern random numbers are assigned to the seven types of advance notice patterns No. 0 to 6 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 40, the night background development type advance notice table is acquired in the above-described step S134 when the display area 42 controls the display of the background image in the night state (night background image 82). This is a table for determining an advanced notice pattern based on the developed advance notice pattern random number. Similarly to the daytime background advance notice table, the night background advance notice table includes seven kinds of advance notice patterns of the advance notice pattern numbers 0 to 6 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns. Random values are distributed.

  In the daytime background development type advance notice table, the above-described development type advance notice pattern numbers 2 to 16 are developed for the night background only when the reachable display pattern is designated as the decorative pattern change display pattern. In the type advance notice table, the determination values are assigned so that the above-described advanced notice pattern numbers 3 to 16 can be selected only when the reachable display pattern is designated as the decorative pattern change display pattern. It has been. When the development type notice pattern of the development type notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 is executed when the variable display pattern that becomes the reach mode is designated as the variable display pattern of the decoration design, the decoration design pattern is displayed after the effect is executed. The reach mode is displayed.

  Further, in the variable display pattern (variable display pattern of variable numbers 23 to 31) instructing execution of “spotlight notification”, only the advanced notification pattern of the above-described advanced notification pattern number 0 can be selected. That is, the determination values are distributed so as not to execute the advanced notice. In addition, in the variable display pattern (variable display patterns of the variable numbers 32 and 33) for instructing the execution of the “actual reach”, any one of the above-described advanced notice patterns of the advanced notice pattern numbers 0, 6, and 7 is used. The determination values are distributed so that is selected.

  Further, in this embodiment, the character body 154 imitating a wolf man by the drive control of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 and the Dracula in the night background development type advance notice table than the day background advance type notice table. Developed advance notice pattern (Development advance notice pattern Nos. 2, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 14, 15, 16) including the effect of appearing character body 152 imitating character body and character body 150 imitating Franken The type notice pattern) is set to be higher.

  In addition, since the operation rate of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 is changed by the change of the background image, it is easy for the player to recognize that the operation rate of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 changes. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are imitated monsters such as a wolf man, Dracula, and Franken, and the background image is displayed as the night background image 82, they are generally recognized to act at night. Improving the operation rate of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 imitating the monster being used can give an impression that the monsters start moving at night.

  In this embodiment, the character images 71 to 73 and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 simulate the same character, but the character image 71 is changed when the background image is changed to the night background image 82. It is possible to more realistically express the state that the character body 150, 152, 154 that actually moves starts to move more than the improvement of the appearance rate of ~ 73, so that the monsters start moving at night. Can be recognized. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, since a character that is generally recognized to act at night is used, the background display is changed to the night background image 82 without explaining the game of the gaming machine in the present invention. The player can easily recognize that the action rate of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 is improved.

  In this embodiment, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are executed in the display area 42 in order to appear in front of the display area 42 (player side) so that a part of the display area 42 is covered. It is possible to grasp the driving state of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 even when paying attention to the effect. Further, since the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear in front of the display area 42, a sense of depth can be given, a three-dimensional effect (three-dimensional) can be executed, and the character body suddenly appears in front of you. Can give the impression of appearing. In addition, since the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are imitated with dimensions larger than the dimensions of the character images 71 to 73 that are displayed and controlled in the display area 42, the driving state of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be further noted. .

  In this embodiment, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are usually built in the rear unit 142 and are not visible to the player, and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear. Since it moves outside the rear unit 142 and changes to a state visible to the player, it can give an impression that the character body suddenly appeared, and pay attention to the effect executed in the display area 42. A strong impression can be given to the player who is.

  Specifically, 2907 judgment values are set in the development type advance notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 in the daytime background use type advance notice table, and 1094 of these judgment values are developed type advance notice pattern numbers 2 and 4. , 5, 8-10, 14-16. In other words, about 38% of the judgment value assigned to the advanced notice pattern for executing the advanced notice effect in the daytime background advance notice table controls driving of one of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155. Are assigned to the advanced notice pattern in which the corresponding character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear.

  On the other hand, 3164 judgment values are set in the development type advance notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 of the night background advance type notice table, and 2387 of these judgment values are developed type advance notice pattern numbers 2, 4, 5, and 5. 8 to 10 and 14 to 16 are allocated. In other words, about 75% of the judgment value assigned to the advanced notice pattern for executing the advanced notice effect in the night background advanced notice table controls driving of one of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155. Are assigned to the advanced notice pattern in which the corresponding character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear.

  Further, in the advanced notice effect executed in this embodiment, an effect of causing characters set in a plurality of stages to appear in sequence from a character set in a lower stage toward a character set in a higher stage is executed. . In this embodiment, the wolf man in the lowest stage (Step 1, Step 1 ′), Dracula in the second stage (Step 2, Step 2 ′), and Franken in the third stage (Step 3, Step 3 ′). Monsters are set in the four highest stages (step 4). In the mysterious novels in which these characters appear, the top-to-bottom relationship (dominance rank) is set in the order of monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man, The character is set.

  Further, each of the character images 71 to 73 and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 corresponding to each character is set with a big hit expectation degree according to the vertical relationship of Monster-kun> Franken> Dracula> Wolf man. In other words, the big hit expectation is set to be higher as the vertical relationship of the character finally displayed or appearing in the advanced notice effect increases.

  Specifically, in the above-described daytime background advance notice table and night background advance notice table, the higher the upper and lower relations of the characters to be finally displayed, the higher the jackpot expectation. The judgment value is assigned to. For example, when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern No. 3 described above is executed in the developed background notice table for the daytime background, the big hit expectation degree is about 42% (196 (assigned to the variable display pattern when the big hit is reached). Total number of judgment values) / 471 (total number of judgment values assigned to all variation display patterns) × 100), whereas the development type of the development type notice pattern number 6 described above in the daytime background development type notice table The big hit expectation degree when the notice pattern is executed is about 50% (280/556 × 100). Therefore, if it is a player who has the knowledge regarding the strange novel in which these characters appear, while being able to specify a stage with a character, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  In this embodiment, a player who does not have knowledge about the strange novel in which the above-mentioned character appears cannot recognize the hierarchical relationship of Monster-kun> Franken> Dracula> Wolf Man, but is a player who does not have knowledge about these. Even if it exists, you may use the character which can recognize predetermined order | rank. For example, when performing an effect to compete for weightlifting, the player uses a muscular character, a medium character, and a slim character to give the player a predetermined rank (in this case, a muscular character> It may be configured to be able to recognize (in order of meat character> slim character).

  Further, in this embodiment, as an advance notice effect, an advanced notice that is displayed in a visible manner to the player in order from the wolf man with the highest vertical relationship among the monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man in the vertical relationship. A pattern and an advanced notice pattern that appears to be visible to the player in order from one of the characters of the monster-kun> franken-> dracula> wolf man's top-to-bottom relationship. Although it is provided, in the advanced notice pattern that is visible to the player in order from the wolf man with the lowest vertical relationship, more characters are visible to the player But the big hit expectation is high.

  At each stage, the character is caused to appear by either one of the image display of the character in the display area 42 and the drive control of the drive motor capable of operating the character. In this embodiment, when the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 among the advanced notice patterns are determined, the development stage of the developed notice effect based on the developed notice pattern random number (that is, the character at any stage). It is determined whether to make the character appear at each stage, ie, the image display of the character in the display area 42 or the drive control of the drive motor capable of operating the character. In addition, the development stage determination random number for determining the development stage of the development type notice effect and the character mode determination random number for determining the appearance mode of the character in each stage are provided, and the development stage is determined based on the development stage determination random number. At each of the determined stages, either character image display in the display area 42 or drive control of a drive motor capable of operating the character may be determined based on the character mode determination random number. .

  Further, in the above-described daytime background advance notice table and night background advance notice table, the expected value of jackpot when the character appearing at each stage is displayed on the display area 42 is displayed. The judgment value is assigned so that the big hit expectation degree when it appears by controlling the drive motor is higher. For example, when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern No. 6 described above (executed step 1, step 2, and step 3 in sequence) is executed in the developed background notice table for the daytime background, the big hit expectation is about 50%. In contrast to (280/556 × 100), the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 8 described above in the developed background notice table for daytime background (step 1, step 2, and step 3 ′ are sequentially executed). The expectation of jackpot when it is executed is about 66% (94/143 × 100).

  Further, in the character images 71 to 73 corresponding to each character and the character images and character bodies corresponding to the same characters of the character bodies 150, 152 and 154, the jackpot expectation set for the character body is higher. The character body corresponding to each character in the vertical relationship of monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man is set to the jackpot expectation set in the character image corresponding to the character one level above. It is set to be substantially the same.

  That is, in the above-mentioned daytime background advance notice table and night background advance notice table, the character is controlled by drive control of the drive motor at a stage ((n-1) stage) lower than the predetermined stage (n stage). The determination value is assigned so that the degree of expectation when the body appears and the degree of expectation when the character body is displayed as an image in the display area in a predetermined stage (n stages) are substantially equal. For example, the development type advance notice pattern of the advance type advance notice pattern number 8 described above (step 1, step 2 and step 3 ′ are sequentially executed) in the day type background advance notice table is executed, and the character body 150 imitating Franken is displayed. The expected degree of jackpot when it appears is about 66% (94/143 × 100), and the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 11 described above in the developed notice table for daytime background (Step 1, Step 2, Step 3. Step 4 is executed sequentially), and after controlling the display of the character image simulating Franken, the expectation of jackpot when the character image simulating the monster is controlled to be about 68% (170/251 × 100 ). Thereby, when the character body 150, 152, 154 appears when the advanced notice effect is executed, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the expectation when the character body appears by the drive control of the drive motor at a stage ((n-1) stage) lower by one stage than the predetermined stage (n stage) and the predetermined stage (n The determination value is assigned so that the expected level when the character body is displayed on the display area in the display step is substantially equal, but one step lower than the predetermined step (n step) ((n-1) ) Stage), the degree of expectation when the character image display control is performed at a predetermined stage (n stages) is one stage lower than the predetermined stage (n stages) (( In the (n-1) stage), a determination value may be assigned so as to be close to the expected level when the character body appears by the drive control of the drive motor. When the character image is displayed and controlled in the predetermined stage (n stage) Expectation level and predetermined stage (n Expectations and, hierarchical relationship does not matter when allowed to appear character body by the drive control of the drive motor in one step lower step ((n-1) step) than floors).

  The intense heat notice selection process (step S113) executed in the notice selection process (step S103) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing intense heat notice selection processing which is a subroutine of notice selection processing. FIG. 43 is a table showing the intense heat notice pattern selected by the sub-integrated board. FIG. 44 is a list display diagram showing the intense heat notice pattern.

  In the intense heat notice selection process (step S113) shown in FIG. 42, the intense heat notice table (FIG. 43) is selected (step S141). Then, the intense heat announcement pattern random number is acquired, and one intense heat announcement pattern is determined from the intense heat announcement pattern set in the intense heat announcement pattern based on the acquired value of the intense heat announcement pattern random number (step S142). ).

  Note that the intense heat notice table is shown in FIG. In this intense heat notice table, five kinds of intense heat notice pattern numbers 0 to 4 are prepared as the intense heat notice patterns of the intense heat notice effect. In addition, when the intense heat notice pattern is determined to be the intense heat notice pattern number 0, the intense heat notice effect is not performed. That is, in the intense heat notice table, whether or not to execute the intense heat notice effect is determined based on the intense heat notice pattern random number, and the intense heat notice pattern of the intense heat notice effect is determined. For example, when it is determined that the intense heat notification pattern numbers 1 to 4 are used, it is determined that the intense heat notification effect is executed, and the determined intense heat notification pattern is used as the intense heat notification pattern of the intense heat notification effect. The number is determined to be a hot fever notice pattern. In addition, a random number for determining whether or not to execute the intense heat announcement effect is provided separately. You may make it determine in any one of 1-4. When the above-described advanced notice is not executed (when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 0 is determined in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process), the intense heat notice effect is executed. Therefore, the process for determining the intense heat warning pattern based on the intense heat warning pattern random number may not be executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 44, the intense heat notice pattern number 1 is an advanced notice pattern (developed notice pattern number 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 including an effect of displaying a wolf man in the display area 42 as an image. , 9, 11, 13, 14, 15), the human figure is different from the human wolf man (step 1 of the advanced notice pattern) which is displayed as an image with a normal evolved notice pattern. This is an intense heat warning pattern that displays the image of the wolf man after transforming from a wolf to a wolf figure. When executing the notice pattern numbers 3, 6, 8, 9, 11, 14), unlike the Dracula (step 2 of the developed notice pattern), which is displayed as an image with a normal evolved notice pattern, Dracula was changed to clothing of the color scheme, which was the color as the base is an intense heat notice pattern to be displayed image.

  The intense heat advance notice number 3 is a normal advance notice when the advanced notice pattern (developed notice pattern number 6, 7, 11, 12) including the effect of displaying Franken in the display area 42 is executed. Unlike Franken, which is displayed as a pattern (Step 3 of the advanced notice pattern), it is an intense heat notice pattern that displays an image of Franken that has been changed to a color scheme based on white. When executing the advanced notice pattern (development notice pattern numbers 11 to 16) including the effect of displaying the image of the monster in the display area 42, the monster (development) displayed in the normal advance notice pattern is displayed. Unlike the step 4) of the mold notice pattern, this is an intense heat notice pattern that displays an image of a monster who has been changed to a white-based clothing color scheme.

  In addition, although the intense heat warning pattern which displays any one of steps 1 to 4 of the intense heat warning pattern is set as the intense heat warning pattern, the intense heat warning which displays a plurality of steps of the intense heat warning pattern is displayed. A pattern may be set. In this case, when deciding whether or not to execute the intense heat announcement effect described later, the characters (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the advanced notice pattern) displayed as images in the advanced notice pattern and the intense heat notice are displayed. The rate of matching with the character determined from the pattern (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the intense heat announcement pattern) is increased, and the intense heat announcement effect is executed over a plurality of stages in the advanced notice effect. It is possible to display a plurality of types of characters based on the intense heat notice pattern.

  Further, as the intense heat announcement pattern, an intense heat announcement pattern for displaying any one of steps 1 to 4 of the intense heat announcement pattern corresponding to steps 1 to 4 of the evolution type announcement pattern is set. An intense heat warning pattern corresponding to pattern steps 1 ′, 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′, which is different from the action of the character body 150, 152, 154 driven by the normal development type warning pattern (character The intense heat warning pattern that drives any of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 may be set by increasing the number of movements of the bodies 150, 152, and 154, or vibrating in small increments. Also in this case, the character body 150, 152, 154 (steps 1 ′, 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′ of the advanced notice pattern) driven by the evolved notice pattern and the character object determined from the intense heat notice pattern. It is determined whether or not the intense heat announcement effect is executed depending on whether or not 150, 152, and 154 match, and the intense heat announcement effect that displays any one of steps 1 to 4 of the intense heat announcement pattern is displayed. The same effect can be obtained, and a variety and diversification of intense heat notice effects can be achieved.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the intense heat notice table is a table for determining the intense heat notice pattern based on the intense heat notice pattern random number acquired in step S142 described above. In the intense heat notice table, the values of the intense heat notice pattern random numbers are assigned to five kinds of intense heat notice patterns 0 to 4 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns.

  In the intense heat notice table, the determination value is set so that the above-mentioned intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 4 can be selected only when the variable display pattern that reaches the reach is designated as the decorative display variable display pattern. Is distributed. When the variable display pattern that is the reach mode is designated as the decorative display variable display pattern, the development notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 are produced as the development notice pattern described above, and an image is displayed using this development notice pattern. Characters (steps 1, 2 and 3 of the intense heat warning pattern) determined from the displayed characters (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the advanced warning pattern) and the intense heat warning pattern numbers 1 to 4 , 4) is matched, the presentation of the intense heat warning pattern is executed, and the character different from the color scheme of the clothing displayed in the normal development type warning pattern (however, in step 1 of the intense heat warning pattern) , A character with a different figure instead of a color scheme of clothing) is displayed.

  In addition, among the variation display patterns that reach as the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol, the variation that can be executed only when the reach determination random number becomes the winning value without the big hit determination random number being the winning value in the big hit determining process When a display pattern (variation display patterns of variation numbers 3, 5, 7,..., 21, 32) is designated, the above-described intense heat announcement pattern number 0 or the intense heat announcement pattern numbers 0, 1 Only the pattern can be selected, but the fluctuation display pattern (variation of fluctuation numbers 4, 6, 8,..., 22, 33) that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes a win value in the big hit determination processing. When the display pattern) is designated, the above-described intense heat notice patterns 2 to 4 can be selected. In other words, when a character (Dracula, Franken, Monster-kun) that is different from the color of the clothing displayed as an image in the normal advance notice pattern is displayed, it is understood that the result of the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes a jackpot symbol. can do.

  Further, in the variable display pattern (variable display patterns of variable numbers 23 to 31) instructing execution of “spotlight notification” and “full rotation reach”, only the above-described intense heat notification pattern No. 0 is included. The determination values are distributed so that selection is possible, that is, the intense heat notice is not executed. Further, in the variable display pattern (variable display pattern with the variable number 33) instructing execution of “actual reach, hit”, only the advance notice pattern numbers 0, 6, and 7 are determined as the above-described advance notice pattern. Because the monster character (step 4 of the advanced notice pattern) is not displayed, the variable display that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes the win value in the big hit determination processing Although it is a pattern, the determination value is not distributed so that the intense heat notification pattern of the intense heat notification pattern number 4 described above is selected.

  Further, in this embodiment, the fever is more intense than the ratio at which the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 (the developed notice pattern for executing the developed notice effect) is selected in the evolved notice pattern. It is set so that the rate at which the intense heat advance notice patterns Nos. 1 to 4 of the intense heat advance notice patterns (the intense heat advance notice pattern for executing the intense heat advance notice effect) are selected in the notice table is reduced.

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number 8 which is a big hit is executed, the extension type of the advance notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 in the daytime background advance notice table. The ratio at which the notice pattern is selected is {138 (the total number of judgment values assigned to the development type advance notice patterns Nos. 1 to 16) / 233 (the judgment value assigned to all the advance type notice patterns). )} × 100 = about 59%, whereas the ratio of the intense heat warning pattern numbers 1 to 4 selected is {20 (high heat warning pattern numbers 1 to 4) The total number of judgment values assigned to the notice pattern) / 202 (the total number of judgment values assigned to all the intense heat notice patterns)} × 100 = about 10%. As described above, in order to determine whether or not to execute the intense heat announcement effect, the characters (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the evolutionary notification pattern) that are displayed as images and the intense heat notification pattern are displayed. As a step before determining whether or not the characters (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the intense heat warning pattern) determined from the intense heat warning patterns Nos. 1 to 4 match, By reducing the ratio of selecting the intense heat notification patterns of the heat notification pattern numbers 1 to 4, the probability that the intense heat notification effect is executed is reduced.

  The lightning bolt notice selection process (step S114) executed in the notice selection process (step S103) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing lightning bolt notice selection processing which is a subroutine of notice selection processing. FIG. 46 is a table showing the daylight background lightning notice pattern selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 47 is a table showing the night background lightning warning pattern selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 48 is a list display diagram showing a lightning bolt notice pattern.

  In the lightning bolt notice selection process (step S114) shown in FIG. 45, it is determined whether or not the daytime background flag is ON (step S151). If the daytime background flag is on, the daylight background lightning notice table (FIG. 46) is selected (step S152). If the daytime background flag is not on (if it is off), the night background lightning notice is displayed. A table (FIG. 47) is selected (step S153). Then, a lightning warning pattern random number is acquired, and one lightning warning pattern is determined from the lightning warning pattern set in each lightning warning pattern based on the value of the acquired lightning warning pattern random number (step S154).

  The daylight background lightning notice table is shown in FIG. 46, and the night background lightning notice table is shown in FIG. In these lightning bolt notice tables, seven types of lightning bolt notice pattern numbers 0 to 6 are prepared as lightning bolt notice patterns for lightning notice. Also, if the lightning warning pattern number 0 is determined among the lightning warning patterns, the lightning warning effect is not performed. That is, in the lightning bolt notice table, it is determined whether or not to execute the lightning bolt warning effect based on the lightning bolt warning pattern random number, and the lightning bolt warning pattern of the lightning bolt warning effect is determined. For example, when the lightning warning pattern numbers 1 to 6 are determined, it is determined to execute the lightning warning effect, and the lightning warning pattern of the determined lightning warning pattern number is used as the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning effect. To decide.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the lightning bolt notice pattern number 1 is a darkened image (for example, a decorative image, a background image, a character, etc.) that darkens the display contents (for example, a decorative symbol, a background image, a character, etc.) when the decorative symbol variation display is started. This is a lightning warning notice pattern that performs an effect (blackout gast effect) that continuously executes the display content before the blackout effect is performed after the blackout effect that performs display control of the dark image 83) for a predetermined time is performed once. .

  Lightning bolt notice pattern No. 2 performs a blackout effect once at the start of the decorative display of decorative symbols, and then continuously executes the display content before the blackout effect is performed. It is a lightning notice pattern that performs an effect (blackout gast effect) that performs an out effect and continuously executes the display content before the second blackout effect is performed again.

  The lightning warning pattern number 3 performs the blackout effect twice in the same manner as the lightning warning pattern number 2, and the effect of changing the background image after the second blackout effect is performed (for example, the background image is a daytime described later). If it is the background image 81, it is a lightning notice pattern for changing to the night background image 82).

  Lightning notice pattern No. 4 performs a blackout effect once at the start of the decorative display of decorative symbols, and then continuously executes the display content before the blackout effect is performed. During the second blackout production, the lightning flash for running lightning (lightning) on the dark image is controlled in the display area 42, and the left decorative pattern 80a is displayed on the dark image by being illuminated by the lightning. It is a lightning warning pattern that produces a stop display while floating up.

  The lightning warning pattern number 5 performs the lightning warning pattern number 4 and then executes the blackout effect again. During the execution of the blackout effect, the second lightning flash is displayed and controlled. This is a lightning notice pattern that produces an effect of forming a reach by stopping and displaying the right decorative design 80c in the dark image.

  Moreover, the lightning warning pattern number 6 is a lightning warning pattern that performs the blackout gaze effect (full rotation gaze) as if the full rotation reach effect described above is performed. In this embodiment, when the full rotation reach effect is executed, a special image that can recognize that the full rotation reach effect may be executed is displayed and controlled. In the lightning warning pattern No. 6, after the display control of this special image, the blackout gasse effect that does not execute the full rotation reach effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the daylight background lightning notice table displays the lightning acquired in step S154 described above when the display area 42 controls the display of the background image (daytime background image 81) indicating the daytime state. It is a table for determining a lightning bolt notice pattern based on a notice pattern random number. In the lightning bolt notice table for the daytime background, the lightning warning pattern random number values are allocated to seven types of lightning warning patterns 0 to 6 corresponding to the variable display patterns.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the night background lightning warning table is acquired in the above-described step S154 when the background image (night background image 82) in the night state is controlled in the display area 42. Lightning bolt warning pattern This is a table for determining a lightning bolt warning pattern based on random numbers. In the lightning bolt warning table for night background, the lightning bolt warning pattern random number value is assigned to seven types of lightning warning pattern Nos. 0-6 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns in the same manner as the lightning bolt warning table for daytime background. It has been.

  In the lightning bolt warning table for the day background and the lightning bolt warning table for the night background, the lightning warning pattern number 4 described above, or only when the variable display pattern that becomes the reach mode is designated as the decorative pattern variable display pattern, or The judgment values are distributed so that the lightning warning pattern No. 5 can be selected. When a lightning bolt notice pattern Nos. 1 to 6 is performed when a variable display pattern that is a reach pattern is designated as the decorative pattern variable display pattern, the decorative pattern reach pattern is executed after executing the effect. Is displayed.

  In addition, a fluctuation display pattern (variation display pattern of fluctuation numbers 23 to 31) for instructing execution of “spotlight notice” and a fluctuation display pattern (variation display patterns of fluctuation numbers 32 and 33) for instructing execution of “object reach”. ), The determination values are distributed so that only the lightning notice pattern of the lightning notice pattern number 2 described above can be selected. Then, when the lightning warning pattern No. 2 with the lightning warning pattern is performed, the super reach development effect executed by each of the characters described above after the execution of the effect is performed, or the feature-driven feature reach is performed. Production is performed.

  Further, in the variation display pattern (variation display pattern of variation number 34) instructing the execution of “full rotation reach”, only the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning pattern number 0 can be selected, that is, lightning. The judgment value is distributed so that the notice effect is not executed. In the variable display pattern instructing the execution of “full rotation reach”, after the display control of the special image described above in the display area 42, an effect similar to the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning pattern number 1, ie, An effect of performing display control of the dark image for a predetermined time is performed.

  In this embodiment, the ratio (selection rate) at which the lightning warning pattern Nos. 4 and 5 is selected in the night background lightning warning table is higher than that of the daytime lightning warning table. Is set. Specifically, for example, when the variation display pattern of “Wolf man, hit” of the variation number 6 is determined, if it is the lightning warning table for the daytime background, the lightning warning of the lightning warning pattern numbers 4 and 5 is used. Pattern selection rate is {(numeric width of lightning warning pattern random number of lightning warning pattern number 4) + (numeric width of lightning warning pattern random number of lightning warning pattern number 5) / number of counters of lightning warning pattern random number} = 116/200 However, in the case of the lightning warning table for the night background, the selection rate of the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning pattern numbers 4 and 5 is 144/200. This corresponds to the fact that lightning is actually easier to see in the night background than in the daytime background.

  In step S154, it is determined whether or not to perform the lightning warning effect by determining either the lightning warning table for daytime background or the lightning warning pattern set in the lightning warning table for night background. However, for example, a random number for determining whether or not to perform a lightning warning effect may be provided, and after determining to perform a lightning warning effect using this random number, it may be determined as one of the lightning warning patterns for performing a lightning warning effect. .

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lightning warning pattern determined in step S154 is a background change of lightning warning pattern number 3 (step S155). If the background has changed, the ON / OFF state of the daytime background flag is switched (step S156). That is, if it is in the ON state, it is in the OFF state, and if it is in the OFF state, it is in the ON state. If the background does not change, the process returns to the main flow as it is. The ON / OFF state of the daytime background flag is stored in the RAM 113c. In addition, a value of “0” is set when the daytime background flag is OFF, and a value of “1” is set when the daytime background flag is ON.

  The mini character notice selection process (step S115) executed in the notice selection process (step S103) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a mini character notice selection process which is a subroutine of the notice selection process. FIG. 50 is a list showing mini character notice patterns selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 51 is a list showing the mini character notice pattern.

  In the mini character notice selection process (step S115) shown in FIG. 49, the mini character notice table (FIG. 50) is selected (step S191). Then, a mini character notice pattern random number is obtained, and one mini character notice pattern is determined from the mini character notice pattern set in the mini character notice table based on the value of the obtained mini character notice pattern random number (step S192).

  A mini character notice table is shown in FIG. In this mini character notice table, 12 types of mini character notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 are prepared as mini character notice patterns of the mini character notice effect. Further, when the mini character notice pattern No. 0 is determined among the mini character notice patterns, the mini character notice effect is not performed. That is, in the mini character notice table, whether or not to execute the mini character notice effect is determined based on the mini character notice pattern random number, and the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice effect is determined. For example, when the mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 are determined, it is decided to execute the mini character notice effect, and the mini character notice pattern of the decided mini character notice pattern number as the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice effect is determined. To decide. A random number for determining whether or not to execute the mini character notice effect is separately provided, and when it is determined that the mini character notice effect is executed based on this random number, the mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 based on the mini character notice pattern random number are provided. You may make it determine in any one of them. Also, a variable display pattern including a mini character notice pattern may be provided, and when the variable display pattern including these mini character notice patterns is determined, a mini character notice effect may be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the mini character notice pattern number 1 is a mini character image representing Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 80c among the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variable display is started. 90 is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying an image of 90. The mini character notice pattern number 2 is the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a of the decorative design when the variable display of the decorative design is started. This is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying a mini character image 91 representing the image.

  The mini character notice pattern number 3 is a mini character imitating a wolf man, Dracula, and Franken on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 80c of the decorative pattern when the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started. This is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying the image 92. The mini character notice pattern number 4 is displayed on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a of the decorative pattern when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. This is a mini character notice pattern that provides an effect of displaying a mini character image 93 imitating a child.

  The mini character notice pattern number 5 displays a mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative symbol 80c among the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variable display is started. Among the decorative symbols, a mini-character warning pattern for performing an effect of displaying a mini-character image 91 representing the older sister Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 80a. The mini-character warning pattern number 6 is a variation of the decorative symbol. When the display is started, a mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi is displayed on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative design 80c among the decorative designs, and a mini character image 92 imitating a triple is displayed. It is a mini character notice pattern that performs the production.

  The mini character notice pattern number 7 displays a mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative symbol 80c among the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variable display is started. Among the decorative symbols, a mini character warning pattern is provided for performing an effect of displaying a mini character image 93 that imitates Kai-chan on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 80a. When the variable display is started, the mini character image 91 representing the Hiroshi sister is displayed on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a of the decorative symbols, and the right decorative symbol 80c of the decorative symbols is changed. A mini character notice pattern that produces an image display of a mini character image 92 simulating a trio on the back of the display area It is.

  The mini character notice pattern number 9 displays a mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi sister on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 80a of the decorative symbol when the decorative symbol variable display is started. , A mini character notice pattern that produces an image display of the mini character image 91 representing the older sister Hiroshi, and the mini character notice pattern number 10 is the right decoration pattern 80c of the decoration symbols when the decorative pattern variation display is started. A mini character image 92 simulating a trio is displayed on the back of the variable display area, and a mini character image 93 simulating Phantom is displayed on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a among the decorative symbols. This is a mini character notice pattern that produces an image display effect.

  Also, the mini character notice pattern number 11 imitates a mini character image 90 and a triplet representing Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 80c among the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variable display is started. The mini character image 92 is displayed as an image, and the mini character image 91 representing the Hiroshi sister and the mini character image 93 imitating Kai-chan are displayed on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a among the decorative symbols. By doing so, it is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying all mini characters as images.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the mini character notice table is a table for determining a mini character notice pattern based on the mini character notice pattern random number acquired in step S163 described above. In the mini character notice table, the values of the mini character notice pattern random numbers are assigned to 12 kinds of mini character notice patterns of mini character notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns.

  In the mini character notice table, the ratio of selecting the mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 (the ratio at which the mini character notice effect is executed) is higher when the display result is a big hit than when the display result is out of place. Judgment values are assigned to. For example, the probability of appearance of a mini character as a mini character notice effect (appearance rate), that is, the probability that the mini character notice pattern of mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 is executed is a normal reach effect (fluctuation display pattern of change number 4) that is a big hit. Is executed, {95 (total number of judgment values assigned to the mini character notice patterns of mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11) / 151 (total number of judgment values assigned to all mini character notice patterns)} X100 = about 63%. In addition, when a normal reach effect (variation display pattern with variation number 3) is executed, (81/151) × 100 = about 54%. Therefore, when the mini character notice effect is executed and the mini character is displayed, it is possible to improve the expectation that the display result is a big hit for the player.

  In addition, the mini character notice pattern numbers 3, 5, 6, including the image display of the mini character image 92 imitating the above-described three-person group only when the variable display pattern that becomes the reach mode is designated as the decorative display variable display pattern. The determination values are distributed so that 8, 10, and 11 can be selected. When the mini character notice pattern Nos. 3, 5, 6, 8, 10, and 11 are executed when the variable display pattern that is the reach form is designated as the decorative pattern change display pattern, at least a triple set After the mini character image 92 simulating the image is displayed, the reach pattern of the decorative symbols is displayed. In other words, when the mini character image 92 imitating a three-person group is displayed, it can be understood that the decorative symbol variation display becomes the reach mode.

  Also, among the variable display patterns that reach as the decorative display variable display pattern, the variable display patterns (variation numbers 4, 6, and 8 that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes a winning value in the big hit determination process. ,..., 22, 35) is designated, the above-mentioned mini character notice pattern 11 can be selected. In other words, when all the mini characters (Hiroshi, Hiroshi sister, trio, and Kai-chan) displayed in the mini character notice are displayed, it is understood that the result of the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes a big hit symbol. Can do.

  In the variable display pattern (variable display pattern of variable numbers 23 to 34) instructing execution of “spotlight advance notice”, “actual object reach”, and “full rotation reach”, the mini character of the above-mentioned mini character advance notice pattern number 0 is used. The judgment values are assigned so that only the notice pattern can be selected, that is, the mini character notice is not executed.

  Further, each of the mini character images 90 to 93 corresponding to each character is set with a big hit expectation degree in the order of Kaiko-chan> Three person group> Hiroshi and Hiroshi sister. In other words, the highest jackpot expectation is set when Kaiko-chan is displayed in the mini character notice effect.

  Specifically, in the above-described mini character notice table, the determination value is assigned so that the expectation level for jackpot is the highest when the mini-character of Kai-chan is displayed. For example, when the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern number 4 (image display of the mini character image 93 imitating Phantom-chan) is executed in the mini character notice table, the big hit expectation degree is 75% (66 (when it becomes a big hit) The total number of judgment values assigned to the variable display pattern of No.) / 88 (the total number of judgment values assigned to all the fluctuation display patterns) × 100). The big hit expectation when the displayed mini character image 90 or the mini character image 91 showing Hiroshi sister is executed is about 33% (165 (the value of the judgment value assigned to the variable display pattern when the big hit is reached). Total number) / 495 (the total number of judgment values assigned to the total variation display pattern) × 100), which is described above. When the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern No. 3 (image display of the mini character image 93 simulating Kai-chan) is executed, the big hit expectation degree is about 67% (165 (in the variable display pattern when the big hit) (The total number of judgment values to be assigned) / 245 (the total number of judgment values to be assigned to all the variation display patterns) × 100). Accordingly, when the Kai-chan mini character is displayed, it is possible to improve the expectation that the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  Moreover, when the mini character of Hiroshi and Hiroshi sister is displayed, the big hit expectation is set lower than when the mini-character of the triplet and Kai-chan is displayed, but the mini character of Hiroshi and Hiroshi sister When the mini characters are displayed in combination, the big hit expectation is set higher than when each of the mini characters of Hiroshi and Hiroshi is displayed alone.

  Specifically, in the above-described mini character notice table, when Hiroshi and Hiroshi sister's mini characters are displayed, the determination value is assigned so that the expected degree of jackpot is high. For example, when the mini character notice pattern of mini character notice pattern number 5 (mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi and image display of mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi sister) is executed in the mini character notice table, the big hit expectation is 88. % (44 (total number of determination values allocated to the variable display pattern when the big hit is obtained) / 50 (total number of determination values allocated to all the variable display patterns) × 100). Therefore, the meanings (expected expectations of big hits) suggested by the mini characters differ between when they are displayed individually and when they are displayed in combination. Even if the degree of expectation of jackpot is low, it does not stop paying attention to Hiroshi, Hiroshi sister's mini character.

  The branch effect notice selection process (step S127) executed in the notice selection process (step S103) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a branch effect notice selection process that is a subroutine of the notice selection process. FIG. 53 is a table showing branch effect notice patterns selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 54 is a list display diagram showing a branch effect notice pattern. FIG. 55 is a list showing branching effect presentation notice patterns selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 56 is a table showing branching effect presentation notice patterns.

  In the branch effect notice selection process (step S127) shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the received variation display pattern command is the variation numbers 5 to 22 and 35 (step S201). If the variation display pattern commands of the variation numbers 2 to 22 and 35 are not received, the process returns to the main flow as it is. Then, it is determined whether or not the received variation display pattern command is variation number 5 to 22 among variation numbers 5 to 22 and 35 (step S202).

  If the received variation display pattern command is variation number 5-22 of variation numbers 5-22, 35 in step S202, the branch effect notification table using the first type branch effect notification pattern (FIG. 54A). (FIG. 53) is selected (step S203), and if the received variation display pattern command is not variation number 5 to 22 (if variation number 35), variation number 35 is a variation display pattern that is a big hit. Then, it is determined whether or not a probability variation jackpot command has been received (step S204). If the probability variation jackpot command has been received (if the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot), the branch effect notice table (FIG. 53) using the second kind branch effect notice pattern (FIG. 54B) is selected (step S205). ) If the probability change jackpot command has not been received (if the jackpot is a non-probability change jackpot), the branch effect notice table (FIG. 53) using the third type branch effect notice pattern (FIG. 54C) is selected. (Step S206). Then, the branch effect notice pattern random number is acquired, and one branch effect notice pattern is determined from the branch effect notice pattern set in the branch effect notice pattern based on the acquired branch effect notice pattern random number (step S207). ).

  A branch effect notice table is shown in FIG. The branch effect notice table includes 24 types of branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 23 as the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the super reach branch effect (branch effect notice) and the branch effect notice pattern number as the second kind branch effect notice pattern. Twelve types of 0 to 11 and 12 types of branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 are prepared as third kind branch effect notice patterns. Here, since the super reach production and the super reach development production are executed based on the fluctuation display patterns of the fluctuation numbers 5 to 22 and 35, the branch production notice (super reach) is made in the process of shifting from the normal reach production to the super reach production. It has already been decided to execute the branch effect. That is, in the branch effect notice table, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the branch effect notice is executed, and only the branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice is determined. Note that a variable display pattern including a branch effect notice pattern may be provided, and the branch effect notice may be executed when the variable display pattern including these branch effect notice patterns is determined.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 54A, 54B, and 54C, the branch effect notice pattern includes the background color of the portrait 90 displayed in the display area 42 and the first time. A combination of three branch effects (characters displayed in the portrait 90) up to the third time is set. In the figure, “O” displays a character image imitating a wolf man in the portrait 90, “Dora” displays a character image imitating the Dracula in the portrait 90, and “Hula” displays the character image imitating the portrait 90. A character image simulating Franken is displayed. In “monster”, a character image simulating monster-kun is displayed in portrait 90, and in “monster”, a character image simulating monster-chan is displayed in portrait 90.

  Here, blue and red are prepared as background colors of the portrait 90. If the blue background color is a normal color (a background color that does not suggest anything) and a red background color is displayed, the super-reach effect does not lead to the derivation of the design, and the super-reach effect is followed. It is determined that the reach development effect is to be executed (however, when the big hit symbol is derived in the super reach effect, the super reach development effect is not executed).

  As shown in FIG. 54 (A), the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0, 10, 20, and 21 indicate the first kind of branch effect notice that displays a character image imitating a wolf man in the third notice of branch effect. It is a pattern. Further, branch effect notice pattern numbers 1 to 3, 11 to 13, 22, and 23 are first kind branch effect notice patterns that display character images imitating Dracula in the third branch effect notice. Further, branch effect notice pattern numbers 4 to 9 and 14 to 19 are first kind branch effect notice patterns that display a character image imitating Franken in the third branch effect notice. As shown in FIG. 54 (B), branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 are second kind effect notice patterns that display a character image imitating a monster in the third branch effect notice. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 are the third kind branch effect notice pattern that displays a character image imitating Kai-chan in the third branch effect notice. .

  As shown in FIG. 53, the branch effect notice table is a table for determining the branch effect notice pattern based on the branch effect notice pattern random number acquired in step S207 described above. In the branch effect notice table, 24 types of branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 23 corresponding to each of the change display patterns of change numbers 5 to 22 for executing the super reach effect, the super reach development effect of the monster-kun reach development effect or Corresponding to the change display pattern of change number 35 for executing the full rotation reach effect, the branch effect notice pattern random number values are assigned to the 12 kinds of branch effect notice patterns 0 to 11. On the other hand, in the variation display patterns of variation numbers 1 to 4 and 23 to 34, since there is no process of transition from the normal reach production to the super reach production, the branch production notice pattern random number value is not distributed.

  In the branch effect notice table, at least when the change display patterns of the change numbers 5 to 10 for executing the wolf man reach effect are designated, the first of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0, 10, 20, and 21 described above are specified. The determination values are distributed so that the one-type branch effect notice pattern can be selected. When the branch effect notice pattern Nos. 0, 10, 20, and 21 are executed when the change display patterns of the change numbers 5 to 10 are designated, the third branch of the branch effects is executed. After the character image imitating the wolf man is displayed on the portrait 90 in the effect announcement, the wolf man reach effect is displayed in which the character image imitating the wolf man is displayed.

  Also, the first branch effect of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 1 to 3, 11 to 13, 22, and 23 described above is specified only when the change display pattern of the change numbers 11 to 16 for executing the dramatic reach effect is specified. The judgment values are distributed so that the notice pattern can be selected. When the branch effect announcement pattern numbers 1 to 3, 11 to 13, 22, and 23 are executed when the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 11 to 16 are designated, After the character image imitating Dracula is displayed on the portrait 90 at the third branch effect notice, the Dracula Reach effect that displays the character image imitating Dracula is executed.

  Further, only when the variation display pattern of the variation numbers 17 to 22 for executing the Franken reach effect is designated, the first branch effect announcement pattern of the branch effect announcement pattern numbers 4 to 9 and 14 to 19 is selected. The judgment values are distributed so as to be possible. If the first kind branch effect notice pattern of branch effect notice pattern numbers 4 to 9 and 14 to 19 is executed when the change display pattern of change numbers 17 to 22 is specified, the third branch of the branch effects is executed. After the character image imitating Franken is displayed on the portrait 90 in the effect notice, the Franken Reach effect is displayed in which the character image imitating Franken is displayed.

  In addition, the above-described second-type branch effect notice pattern with the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 described above is provided only when the change display pattern of the change number 35 for executing the super reach branch premier effect is specified and the odd probability change is a big hit. The determination values are distributed so that can be selected. When the variation display pattern of the variation number 35 is designated and the branch effect announcement pattern numbers 0 to 11 of the branch effect announcement pattern numbers 0 to 11 are executed when the uncertain change is a big hit, the third of the branch effects is executed. After displaying the character image that imitates the monster on the portrait 90 in the branch effect notice, the super reach effect is not executed, and the monster-kun reach development effect that displays the character image that imitates the monster is executed. A non-probable big hit symbol (a combination of non-specific symbols) is displayed in the monster-kun reach development effect.

  Further, only when the variation display pattern of the variation number 35 for executing the super reach branch premier effect is designated and the probability variation is a big hit, the above-described third type branch effect announcement pattern of the branch effect announcement pattern numbers 0 to 11 is displayed. The judgment values are distributed so that they can be selected. When the variation display pattern of the variation number 35 is designated and the third branch effect announcement pattern of the branch effect announcement pattern numbers 0 to 11 is executed when the probability variation is a big hit, the third branch of the branch effect is executed. After displaying the character image that imitates Kaiko-chan on the portrait 90 in the performance notice, the super-reach effect is not executed and the full-reach reach effect is executed. A combination of symbols) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the second type branch effect notice pattern or the third type branch effect notice pattern based on the variation display pattern determined by the main control board 101 and the game state flag (here, the probability change state flag). However, by including game state information in the variable display pattern, the branch effect notice pattern is determined based on the variable display pattern including the game state information. May be. For example, in the variation display pattern of variation number 35, if the variation display pattern for displaying the probability variation jackpot and the variation display pattern for displaying the non-probability variation jackpot are set in the variation display pattern table after the super reach branch premier effect is executed. Good. In this case, there is no need to distinguish between the second type branch effect notice pattern and the third type branch effect notice pattern, and it can be a single kind of branch effect notice pattern. In the branch effect notice table, the game state Different determination values can be assigned to each of the variable display patterns including the above information.

  Also, no outlier symbol is derived in the super reach production, the big hit symbol is derived in the super reach production, or the variation numbers 6 to 10 and 12 to 16 are executed after the super reach production. , 18 to 22, the determination values are distributed so that the above-described first type branch effect notice patterns of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 10 to 19 can be selected only when the variable display patterns of 18 to 22 are designated. When the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 6, 12 and 18 are designated, if the first-type branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 10 to 19 is executed, the super reach effect after the branch effect is executed A big hit symbol is displayed at. When the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 10 to 19 is executed when the change display patterns of the change numbers 7 to 10, 13 to 16, and 19 to 22 are designated, the branch effect is given. After performing the above, the super reach development effect is executed via the super reach effect.

  Also, the first to third branch effect notices executed in this embodiment (branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 19 of the first kind branch effect notice pattern, branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 of the second kind In the branch effect notice pattern and the branch effect notice pattern Nos. 0 to 11 of the third kind effect effect notice pattern), as in the advanced notice effect, the upper and lower relations depend on the upper and lower relations of the monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man. An effect of sequentially appearing toward the upper character is executed. However, unlike the advanced notice effect, characters having the same vertical relationship can appear over multiple (two or three) branch effect notices.

  Also, in the super reach effect and the super reach development effect after the third branch effect notice is executed, the expectation level for jackpots is set to be higher as the character's vertical relationship rises. In addition, the super reach development effect that is determined to be executed when the background color of the portrait 90 displayed in the branch effect notice is red is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the super reach effect. . Therefore, it is possible to specify the super reach effect and the super reach development effect by the character displayed in the third branch effect notice and the background color of the portrait 90 displayed in the first to third branch effect notices. In addition, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  Further, in this embodiment, the branch effect notice includes the second or third notice of the branch effect that is displayed toward the lower character in the upper and lower relations of monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man. The branch effect notice pattern is provided in the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 20-23.

  Specifically, only when the variation display pattern of variation numbers 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 from which the jackpot symbol is derived in the super reach production or the super reach development production is designated, the branch production notice pattern The determination values are distributed so that the first type branch effect notice patterns of numbers 20 to 23 can be selected. When the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 20 to 23 is executed when the change display patterns of the change numbers 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 are designated, 2 of the branch effect. In the third or third time, the vertical relationship is displayed toward the lower character, and the big hit symbol is displayed in the super reach effect or the super reach development effect after executing the branch effect. Thereby, attention is paid to the character displayed in the branch effect notice from the first time to the third time, and the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be gradually increased.

  Further, in the branch effect notice table, the branch effect notice pattern in which the background color of the portrait 90 is blue (the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 9 and the first of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 5 is shown. A branch effect notice pattern (branch effect notice pattern number 10 to 10) in which the background color is red rather than a ratio in which two kinds of branch effect notice patterns and branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 5 are selected. 19 first type branch effect notice pattern, second effect branch notice pattern of branch effect notice pattern numbers 6 to 11 and third kind branch effect notice pattern of branch effect notice pattern numbers 6 to 11) are selected. It is set to be low.

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the variation display pattern of variation number 8 that is a big hit is executed, the proportion of the branch effect announcement pattern number 0 of the type 1 branch effect announcement pattern is selected. , {57 (judgment value assigned to first branch effect notice pattern of branch effect notice pattern number 0) / 73 (total number of decision values assigned to all first kind branch effect notice pattern)} × 100 = About 78%, the proportion of the branch effect notice pattern number 10 of the branch effect notice pattern number 10 selected is assigned to {12 (branch effect notice pattern number 10 of the first kind branch effect notice pattern). Determination value) / 73 (the total number of determination values assigned to all first-type branch effect announcement patterns)} × 100 = about 16%.

  Further, in the branch effect notice table, the branch effect notice pattern (the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 19) to be sequentially displayed toward the upper character in the vertical relationship is more than the ratio selected. The ratio at which the branch effect notice pattern including the branch effect notice displayed for the character whose upper and lower relations are lower (the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 20 to 23) is significantly reduced. Is set to

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number 8 that is a big hit is executed, the first type branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 and 10 is selected. The ratio is {69 (determination value assigned to the first kind branch effect notice pattern of branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 and 10) / 73 (total number of decision values assigned to all first kind branch effect notice patterns) )} × 100 = about 95%, the proportion of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 20 and 21 of the first kind branch effect notice pattern selected is {4 (the number of branch effect notice pattern numbers 20 and 21 The determination value assigned to the first-type branch effect notice pattern) / 73 (the total number of determination values assigned to all first-type branch effect notice patterns)} × 100 = about 5%. In this way, all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the derivation of the big hit symbol by greatly reducing the ratio of selecting the branch effect notice pattern including the branch effect notice pattern that is displayed toward the character whose upper and lower relations are lower. In the case where the previously recognized ratio is executed at a low rate while the branch effect notice pattern is executed, it is possible to improve the level of bliss for the fact that the derivation of the jackpot symbol is recognized before all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

  Next, after determining the branch effect notice notice pattern in step S207, the branch effect notice notice table (FIG. 55) is selected (step S208). Then, branch branch effect announcement notice pattern random number is acquired, and one branch role is selected from the branch feature effect notice pattern set in the branch feature effect notice pattern based on the acquired branch feature effect notice pattern random number. An object effect notice pattern is determined (step S209).

  FIG. 55 shows a branch accessory effect notice table. In the branching effect presentation notice table, three types of branching effect presentation pattern numbers 0 to 2 are prepared as branching effect presentation notice patterns of branching effect presentation. In addition, when the branching instrument effect notice pattern is determined to be the branching accessory notice pattern number 0, the branching effect effect notice is not performed. That is, in the branching effect presentation notice table, it is determined whether or not the branching effect presentation notice is executed based on the branching action presentation notice pattern random number, and the branching effect presentation notice pattern of the branching effect presentation notice is determined. Is determined. For example, when it is determined that the branching object effect notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 are determined, the branching object notice is determined to be executed and the branching effect effect notice pattern is determined as the branching effect effect notice pattern. The branching effect presentation notice pattern of the branching effect presentation notice pattern number is determined. In addition, a separate random number for determining whether or not to execute the branching effect presentation notice is provided, and when it is determined that the branching effect presentation notice is executed based on this random number, branching is performed based on the branching effect presentation notice pattern random number. You may make it determine in any one of the accessory effect notice pattern numbers 1 and 2. In addition, a variable display pattern including a branch effect announcement notice pattern is provided together with a branch effect announcement pattern, and when the variable display pattern including the branch effect announcement pattern and the branch effect presentation notice pattern is determined, the branch effect notice is displayed. As a part, a branch accessory effect notice may be executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56, the branching effect presentation notice pattern number 1 is a drive motor 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 when a predetermined character is displayed in the display area 42 as the third branch presentation notice. This is a branching effect presentation notice pattern that produces an effect of causing all the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear in front of the display area 42. Here, a part of the character body 150, 152, 154 is visually recognized without making the entire shape of the character body 150, 152, 154 visible like the movement of the character body 150, 152, 154 by the advanced notice pattern. The character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are rattled in a state before the appearance position where the entire shape of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be visually recognized (a state where the shielding members 164, 166, and 168 are not fully opened). The drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are driven and controlled so as to operate in a small and intense manner.

  In addition, the branch character effect announcement pattern number 2 is a character body 150, 152, 154 that imitates the same character as the character when a predetermined character is image-displayed in the display area 42 as the third branch effect announcement. Is a branching effect presentation notice pattern in which the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are driven and controlled to appear in front of the display area 42. Here, the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are driven to the appearance positions where the entire shapes of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be visually recognized, like the movements of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 according to the advanced notice pattern. Control.

  It should be noted that in the branching effect presentation notice pattern of branching effect presentation notice number 1, all character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are moved in front of the appearance position, but as a third branching effect notice. The drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are driven and controlled so that only the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 imitating the same character as the character displayed in the display area 42 move in front of the appearance position. May be. Further, in the branching effect presentation notice pattern with the branching effect presentation notice pattern number 2, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 imitating the same character as the character displayed in the display area 42 as the third branching effect notice. However, the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 may be driven and controlled so that all the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are moved to the appearance position. Furthermore, the branching effect presentation notice is an effect that causes the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear only in the third branch presentation notice, but is also displayed in the display area 42 in the first and second branch presentation notices. It may be an effect of causing the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear in accordance with the existing character.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the branching effect presentation notice table is a table for determining a branching effect presentation notice pattern based on the branching action presentation notice pattern random number acquired in step S209 described above. In the branching effect presentation notice table, three types of branching effect presentation notice patterns of branching effect production pattern numbers 0 to 2 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns of variation numbers 5 to 22 and 35 for executing the branching effect notice are executed. The random value of the branching effect production notice pattern is distributed. When the variation display pattern with the variation number 35 is executed, a monster or a monster character will be displayed in the display area 42 as the third branch effect notice. Since the character body imitating the same character is not provided, the variation display pattern with the variation number 35 has the branching agent effect announcement pattern random number value in the branching agent effect announcement pattern with the branching agent effect pattern number 2. Not assigned.

  In the branching effect presentation notice table, the big hit expectation is set higher than when the fluctuation display pattern (fluctuation display pattern in which the super reach production is executed) in which the big hit expectation is set low is executed. When the variable display pattern (the variable display pattern in which the monster-kun reach development effect is executed as the super reach development effect) is executed, the branching effect effect notice pattern for causing the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear is selected. The ratio is set to be high.

  For example, when a wolf male reach effect is executed and a variable display pattern with a variable number 6 that is a big hit is executed, the branch character effect notice pattern Nos. 1 and 2 are selected. The ratio is {16 (the total number of judgment values assigned to the branching effect presentation notice patterns of the branching effect presentation notice patterns Nos. 1 and 2) / 98 (the judgment value assigned to all the branching action presentation notice patterns) )} × 100 = about 16%, the monster man reach production is executed after the wolf man reach production is executed, and the variation display pattern of variation number 10 which is a big hit is executed. In this case, the ratio at which the branch effect notice pattern with the branch effect notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 is selected is {23 (the branch effect effect notice pattern with the branch effect effect notice pattern numbers 1 and 2). Has become allocated total determination value is) / 98 (the total number of judgment values that are allocated to all branches won game presentation notice patterns)} × 100 = about 23%.

  Further, when the variable display pattern from which the jackpot symbol is derived is executed, compared to the case where the variable display pattern from which the off symbol is derived is executed, the branching effect presentation notice for causing the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear. The pattern selection ratio is set to be high.

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number 7 is executed, the branch accessory effect notice pattern Nos. 1 and 2 are selected. The ratio is (14/98) × 100 = about 14%, but branching occurs when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number 8 which is a big hit is executed. The ratio that the branch effect notice pattern of the effect notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 is selected is (20/98) × 100 = about 20%.

  In addition, in the order of the branching effect presentation notice pattern number 0, the branching effect presentation notice pattern number 1, and the branching effect presentation notice pattern number 2, the winning combination with respect to the variable display pattern from which the outlier design is derived. The variable display pattern from which the symbol is derived is set to be executed at a higher rate.

  For example, the big hit expectation degree when the branch accessory effect notice pattern No. 0 is executed is about 49% (692 (allocated to the variable display pattern when the big hit is among the change numbers 5 to 22). The total number of determination values) / 1425 (the total number of determination values assigned to the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 5 to 22) × 100), and the branching agent effect announcement pattern No. 1 is executed. The big hit expectation degree at the time of hitting is about 53% (138/258 × 100), whereas the big hit expectation degree when the branching accessory effect notice pattern No. 2 is executed is about 68. % (43/63 × 100). In this way, when the branch object effect notice pattern No. 1 is executed and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 operate in a rattling manner, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 do not operate. The player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be enhanced, and further, the branching effect directing notice pattern of the branching effect directing notice pattern number 2 is executed and displayed in the display area 42 as the third branching effect notice. When the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 imitating the same character as the existing character appear, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be further enhanced rather than the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 moving in a rattling manner. it can.

  In the notice selection process (step S103), the above-described advanced notice process (step S112), the intense heat notice process (step S113), and the lightning notice process (step S114) are sequentially executed, and then determined by these processes. Whether or not to perform a notice effect (development notice effect, intense heat notice effect, lightning notice effect) based on the notice pattern, and any notice effect (notice pattern) to be executed when the notice effect is executed Is determined by the processing of steps S116 to S122. As shown in FIG. 37, it is determined whether or not the advanced notice pattern determined in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process (step S112) is the evolved notice pattern number 0 (step S116). If it is not the advanced notice pattern number 0 (if it is the evolved notice pattern number 1 to 16), the evolved notice pattern determined in step S134 is set (step S117). By setting the advanced notice pattern in step S117, the sub information output process (step S109) transmits it to the second electrical control board 113, and the second electrical control board 113 receives the advanced notice pattern. Sometimes, the CPU 113a controls to start the advanced notice effect. Further, in the sub-information output process (step S109), the advanced notice pattern is transmitted to the second illumination control board 113, and at the predetermined timing (the advance notice pattern step for causing the character bodies 150, 152, 154 to appear is started. At the timing, a drive signal is output to the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, and the character bodies 150, 152, 154 appear.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the intense heat notice pattern determined in step S142 of the intense heat notice selection process (step S113) is the intense heat notice pattern number 0 (step S118). If the intense heat warning pattern number is not 0 (if the intense heat warning pattern number is 1 to 4), the character displayed as an image in the advanced notice pattern (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the advanced notice pattern) It is determined whether or not the characters (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the intense heat warning pattern) determined from the intense heat warning patterns No. 1 to 4 match (step S119). If the characters match, the intense heat warning pattern determined in step S142 is set (step S120). By setting the intense heat warning pattern in step S120, it is transmitted to the second lighting control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S109) together with the advanced warning pattern set in step S120. At 113, the CPU 113a receives the intense heat warning pattern at the predetermined timing of the advanced warning effect that has already been started (the start timing of the step of the advanced warning pattern that causes the matched character to appear). Control to start the notice effect is performed. If the intense heat notice pattern number is 0 in step S118 or if the character does not match in step S119, the process proceeds to step S123.

  In this embodiment, the character displayed in the developed notice pattern (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the developed notice pattern) in step S119 and the intense heat notice pattern Nos. 1 to 4 are determined. It is determined whether or not to execute the intense heat notification effect by determining whether or not the character (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the intense heat notification pattern) matches. Here, the rate at which the intense heat notice effect is executed is set higher in the case of a big hit than in the case where the display result is out of sync.

  For example, the probability of the appearance of a wolf man with a different appearance as an intense heat notice effect (appearance rate), that is, the probability that the intense heat notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern number 1 is executed, the wolf man reach development effect is executed, In addition, when the variation display pattern of variation number 8 which is a big hit is executed, the intense heat notification pattern of intense heat notification pattern number 1 is executed in advance type advance pattern numbers 1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 11, 13, 14, and 15 when the advanced notice pattern is executed. {90 (Developed notice pattern numbers 1, 3, 4, 6, Total number of judgment values assigned to 8, 9, 11, 13, 14, 15 advanced notice patterns) / 233 (total number of judgment values assigned to all advanced notice patterns)} × {14 Thermal notice pattern The total number of judgment values that are allocated to the intense heat notice patterns of issue 1) / 202 (which is all the total number of evolved notice determination value allocated to the pattern)} × 100 = about 2.7%. In addition, when the same wolf man reach development effect as described above is executed and the change display pattern of change number 7 which is out of place is executed, (104/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about It is 0.44%. Therefore, when a fierce heat notice effect is executed and a character different from the image displayed in the normal advanced notice effect (developed notice effect without executing the fierce heat notice effect) appears, it is displayed to the player. The expectation that the result is a big hit can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the 1-byte execution area in the RAM 111c of the sub-integrated board 111, the intense heat notice pattern random number is updated in a numerical range of 0 to 201. In the 1-byte execution area, the upper limit of the numerical range of random numbers that can be updated is 256 (0 to 255), and the determination is simply made that the intense heat announcement pattern random number is assigned to the intense heat announcement pattern for executing the intense heat announcement effect. When the intense heat announcement effect is executed when the value matches the value, even if the upper limit numerical range is used as the intense heat announcement pattern random number, the lower limit of the probability that the intense heat announcement effect is executed is 1/256 ×. 100 = about 0.39%. On the other hand, in the case where the intense heat advance notice effect is executed only when the specific advanced notice effect is executed, when the evolved pattern random number is updated in the execution area of 1 byte (in this embodiment, Even if the advanced notice pattern random number is updated in the numerical range of 0 to 232, a 1-byte execution area is used), the lower limit of the probability that the intense heat notice effect is executed is (1 / 256) × (1/256) × 100 = about 0.0015%, and the probability that the intense heat notice effect is executed can be sufficiently reduced.

  Specifically, for example, the probability (appearance rate) that a monster with a different color scheme of appearance appears as an intense heat announcement effect, that is, the probability that the intense heat announcement pattern of the intense heat announcement pattern number 4 will be executed is wolf man reach When the development effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number 8 which is a big hit is executed, (26/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.11%. Therefore, the intense heat announcement effect is executed only when a specific advanced announcement effect is executed, so that the premier intense heat that is rarely executed while saving the use area of the RAM is saved. A notice effect can be realized.

  In addition, when the intense heat warning effect is executed when the random number of the intense heat warning pattern coincides with the judgment value assigned to the intense heat warning pattern that executes the intense heat warning effect, the intense heat warning effect is regular. (Since the intense heat warning pattern random number is updated every predetermined time, the timing when the intense heat warning pattern random number matches the judgment value, that is, the timing when the intense heat warning effect can be executed. Will be regular), but only when a specific advanced notice effect is executed, the intense heat notice effect is executed (the character determined from the image displayed in the advanced notice effect and the intense heat notice pattern) Only when they match, the intense heat announcement effect is executed as part of the advanced notice effect). There is a chance the appearance of the data, the game is not to become monotonous, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Also, instead of setting the intense heat warning pattern (the intense heat warning pattern that causes different characters such as the color scheme of the clothes to appear) as a part of the advanced warning effect, When it is configured to be included in the advanced notice pattern, it is necessary to prepare a new advanced notice pattern for each of the advanced notice patterns that can be executed. The amount of data to be stored in the ROM 111b of the sub-integrated board 111, which is the storage area for the advanced notice pattern, becomes enormous. By executing the intense heat announcement effect only when is executed, it is possible to reduce the data amount of all the warning patterns to be stored in the ROM 111b. .

  In addition, an advanced notice pattern in which an advanced notice effect is executed and an intense heat notice pattern in which an intense heat notice effect is executed independently of the advanced notice effect are set, and the intense heat notice effect is executed. Even if it is determined that the advanced notice effect is to be executed, the advanced notice effect is not executed and the intense heat notice effect is preferentially executed. In such a case, the notice effect itself will be changed, and the derivation balance of the advanced notice effect may be impaired, but the intense notice effect is only given when a specific advanced notice effect is executed. The derivation balance of the advanced notice effect is not impaired by setting the intense heat notice pattern to be executed and causing the intense notice effect to be executed as part of the advanced notice effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the probability (appearance rate) that a character different from the character displayed in the advanced notice effect as an intense notice effect will appear in the vertical relationship of monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man. It is set differently depending on the situation. That is, as the character's vertical relationship becomes higher, the appearance rate of the character displayed as an intense heat announcement effect is set to be lower.

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed when the background image is the daytime background image 81 and the change display pattern of the change number 8 which is a big hit is executed, The appearance rate of different wolf men (probability of executing the intense heat warning pattern No. 1) is (90/233) × (14/202) × 100 = about 2.7%, and the color scheme of the clothes The appearance rate of Dracula with different (probability of executing the intense heat warning pattern No. 2 is executed) is (66/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.28%, and the color scheme of the clothing Appearance rate of the different Franken (probability of executing the intense heat warning pattern No. 3 is executed) is (43/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.18%, and the color scheme of the clothing Different monsters Incidence of (probability of intense heat notice patterns of intense heat notice pattern number 4 is executed) has a (26/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.11%.

  Here, the ratio (2/202) determined from each of the intense heat announcement patterns of the intense heat announcement pattern numbers 2 to 4 to each of the intense heat announcement patterns is the same, but as the character's vertical relationship rises, Since the proportion determined to be the advanced notice pattern in which the corresponding intense heat notice pattern is executed decreases, the appearance rate of the character displayed as an intense heat notice effect decreases. Therefore, as the character's vertical relationship rises, the character displayed as an image of the intense hot notice appears rarely, and the bliss level when a character whose character's vertical relationship is high appears Can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, characters appearing at each stage are displayed on the display area 42 in the daytime background advance notice table and the night background advance notice table. The determination value is assigned so that the expected degree of big hit when it appears by controlling the drive motor is higher than the expected degree of big hit. For this reason, when it is determined that the variation display pattern is a big hit, the rate at which the character appears by controlling the drive motor is higher than in the case where the variation display pattern is determined to be out of order, and in step S154. Characters (images of the advanced notice pattern) which are determined from the characters (images 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the advanced notice pattern) displayed by the advanced notice pattern and the intense notice patterns of the intense notice pattern numbers 1 to 4 The rate at which Steps 1, 2, 3, 4) match is low.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the drive motors 150h and 152h are the driving motors 150h and 152h among the advanced notice patterns that execute the advanced notice effect in the night background developed notice table than the day background developed notice table. , 153f, and 155, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio of the advanced notice pattern that causes the corresponding character body 150, 152, 154 to appear is increased. For this reason, when the background image displayed in the display area 42 is the night background image 82, the ratio of causing the character to appear by displaying the image in the display area 42 is lower than in the case of the daytime background image 81, In step S119, the character displayed by the developed notice pattern (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the developed notice pattern) and the character determined from the intense notice pattern of the intense notice pattern numbers 1 to 4 (extremely fever The proportion that the steps 1, 2, 3, 4) of the notice pattern match is low.

  As described above, when the background image displayed in the display area 42 is the night background image 82, the corresponding character bodies 150, 152, and 155 are controlled by driving the driving motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155. In the case where the background image is the daytime background image 81, the character determined from the intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 4 was improved by increasing the ratio of causing 154 to appear, but the background image is the daytime background image 81. The expectation that will be a big hit can be improved by increasing the ratio of appearing. In addition, as described above, when the display pattern is determined to be a big hit, or when the background image is the night background image 82, a character that is displayed as an intense heat notice effect appears rarely. The bliss when this character appears can be improved.

  In step S116, if the advanced notice pattern determined in step S134 is developed notice pattern number 0, whether or not the lightning notice pattern determined in step S154 of the lightning notice selection process is lightning notice pattern number 0. Is discriminated (step S121). If it is not the lightning warning pattern number 0 (if it is lightning warning pattern numbers 1 to 6), the lightning warning pattern determined in step S154 is set (step S122). When the lightning warning notice pattern is set in step S122, it is transmitted to the second lighting control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S109), and when the lightning warning notice pattern is received by the second lighting control board 113, The CPU 113a controls to start the lightning notice effect. In addition, the sub information output process (step S109) transmits the lightning warning pattern to the second electrical control board 113, and starts displaying lightning based on the predetermined timing (lightning warning pattern Nos. 4 and 5). At a timing, a drive signal is output to the effect lamps 44a and 44b, and the effect lamps 44a and 44b are turned on and blinked.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the mini character notice pattern determined in step S192 of the mini character notice selection process is the mini character notice pattern number 0 (step S123). If the mini character notice pattern number is not 0 (if the mini character notice pattern number is 1 to 11), the mini character notice pattern determined in step S192 is set (step S124). When the mini character notice pattern is set in step S124, it is transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S109), and when the mini character notice pattern is received by the second electrical design control board 113, The CPU 113a controls to start the mini character notice effect.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the received variation display pattern command is variation numbers 5 to 22 and 35 (step S125). If the change number is 5 to 22, 35, the branch effect notice pattern should be determined in step S207, and this branch effect notice pattern is set (step S126). If the change numbers are not 5 to 22 and 35, the process returns to the main flow as it is.

  And it is discriminate | determined whether the branching effect presentation notice pattern determined in step S209 of the branching effect notice selection process is the branching effect presentation notice pattern number 0 (step S127). If the branching effect presentation notice pattern number is not 0 (if the branching action presentation notice pattern number is 1 or 2), the branching effect presentation notice pattern determined in step S209 is set (step S128). By setting the branch effect notice pattern in step S126, the sub information output process (step S109) transmits to the second illumination control board 113, and the second effect control board 113 receives the branch effect notice pattern. Sometimes, the CPU 113a controls to start the branch effect notice. Also, by setting the branching effect presentation notice pattern in step S128, the branching effect presentation notice pattern is transmitted to the first electrical decoration control board 112 in the sub-information output process (step S109), and the predetermined timing (branching combination is displayed). Drive start motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 at the start timing of the third branch effect notice that causes the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear based on the branch effect notice pattern of object effect notice pattern numbers 1 and 2) A signal is output, and character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear.

  Next, the sound control process (step S104) executed in the effect control process will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the sound output mode to be output by the sound wave device 115 is determined by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated substrate 111, and a drive signal is output to the sound wave device 115 according to the sound output mode. The ROM 1114b mounted on the waveform control board 114 stores a plurality of types of sound output data, and the ROM 111b mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 stores the ROM 1114b mounted on the waveform control board 114. A signal instructing driving of the sound wave device 115 is provided for each of a plurality of types of sound output data in a one-to-one correspondence.

  In this embodiment, the decorative pattern 80a to 80b is displayed in the display area 42 until the reach mode is formed and the reach effect is started, or the decorative pattern 80a is displayed in the display area 42. A predetermined sound output is executed from the start of the variable display of ˜80b until the display of the symbol is stopped without forming the reach mode. In this embodiment, control is performed so that the sound output mode to be output differs according to the background image. In the ROM 114b mounted on the waveform control board 114, the day background normal sound data indicating the day background normal sound corresponding to the day background image 81 and the night background normal sound data indicating the night background normal sound corresponding to the night background image 82 are stored. Is stored. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the change of the background image more clearly.

  In this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the sound is controlled so as to output a special sound different from these normal sounds (day background normal sound, night background normal sound) and mounted on the waveform control board 114. The ROM 114b also stores special sound data indicating special sounds. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where a special sound is output, control is performed so that the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed when the special sound is output. It raises the expectation for the promising big hit of the person.

  In this embodiment, no special sound is provided for each background image. That is, when outputting a special sound, the same special sound is output regardless of the type of the background image. With this configuration, it is easy for the player to recognize that a special sound is being output, so that a sense of expectation for the probable big hit can be increased when the special sound is output. In addition, you may comprise so that a special sound may differ for every background image, and since the combination of the background image displayed and the sound output aspect output increases in this case, the effect performed Can be diversified.

  In this embodiment, the change in the background image and the change in the sound output mode (normal sound) are synchronized, and a special sound different from the normal sound is output when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player's expectation can be synergistically increased by the background image and the sound output mode. For example, in the state in which the display of the night background image 82 is controlled, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit can be enhanced as compared with the case where the normal daytime background image 81 is displayed, and the special image regardless of the type of the background image. In the state in which the sound is output, the player's sense of expectation for the probable big hit can be enhanced compared to the case in which the normal sound is output. Further, in the state where these are combined, that is, the night background image 82 is displayed. In a state where the display is controlled and a special sound is output, both the player's expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the probable big hit can be enhanced.

  Further, the player's expectation can be increased step by step by the type of background image and the sound output mode. For example, the display state of the daytime background image 81 and the state in which the normal sound is output <the state in which the daytime background image 81 is displayed and the state in which the special sound is output ≦ the display of the night background image 82 is controlled, and In addition, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit and the probable big hit can be increased step by step in the order of the normal sound output state <the night background image 82 is displayed and the special sound is output.

  FIG. 57 shows sound control processing executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. First, the CPU 111a executes a sound change determination process (step S161). In the sound change determination process, it is determined whether or not to change the sound output mode output by the sound wave device 115 based on a determination table described later.

  Here, the determination table set in accordance with the type of the variation pattern for starting the next variation display and the sound output mode in the previous variation display will be described. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a probability variation big hit determination table, a non-probability variable big hit determination table, a reach determination table, and a loss determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 58, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern for starting the next variation display is the probability variation jackpot, that is, when the probability variation jackpot command is received when the variation pattern that is the jackpot is received, Next, when the fluctuation pattern that starts the fluctuation display is a non-probable big hit, that is, when the fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit is received, the probability variation big hit command is not received, and the fluctuation pattern that starts the fluctuation display next When the reach is out of sync, that is, when the variation pattern that is out of reach with the reach mode is received, and when the next change pattern that starts the display of variation is out of the range without the reach mode, that is, normal variation, and When a fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuations is received, it is different from normal sounds (day background normal sounds, night background normal sounds) and special sounds. The determination table is provided a plurality of types that are set, respectively.

  In the probability variation big hit determination table that is selected when the variation pattern for starting the next variation display is the probability variation big hit, a determination value is assigned so that the sound output mode in the previous variation display is continued at a high rate. If the probability change jackpot is changed at a high rate from the normal sound to the special sound, the player's expectation for the probability change jackpot is reduced when the normal sound is output. Therefore, even if the sound output mode in the previous fluctuation display is a normal sound and the next fluctuation display is a probable big hit, the normal sound is output by continuing the normal sound at a high rate. Does not reduce the expectation for. Further, when the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a special sound, the sound output mode is changed at a higher rate than in the case where the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a normal sound. The player's interest can be further improved by reducing the sense of expectation for the probable jackpot by switching to the sound and then making the probable jackpot.

  Next, in the non-probability variable big hit determination table selected when the fluctuation pattern for starting the fluctuation display is non-probable variable big hit, determination values are assigned so that the sound output mode is a normal sound. In this embodiment, when the normal pattern is output by changing to the normal sound when the fluctuation pattern to start the next fluctuation display becomes the non-probable big hit, the special sound is further prevented so that the normal sound is not output. Is controlled so that it is always a probable big hit. By configuring in this way, when a special sound is output, the player's sense of expectation for the probable big hit can be enhanced.

  In the probability variation big hit determination table, if the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a special sound, the sound output mode is changed at a higher rate than when the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a normal sound. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern that starts the next fluctuation display is a non-probable big hit, even if it is changed to a normal sound, the player does not know whether it is a probable big hit or a non-probable big hit. Even when the special sound is changed to the normal sound when the display is started, the expectation for the probable big hit is not lowered so much.

  Further, in the reach failure determination table and the disconnection determination table, determination values are assigned so that the sound output mode in the previous variation display is continued at a high rate. As described above, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in this embodiment is 1/490, and most of the fluctuation patterns specified from the main control board 101 are the reach fluctuation and the deviation fluctuation patterns. Therefore, when the next fluctuation display is out of reach or out of reach, the sound output mode is not changed frequently (continue to some extent) by continuing the sound output mode at a high rate, so the sound output mode is changed frequently. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  Next, the CPU 111a determines whether or not the special sound output flag is set (step S162). The special sound output flag is set when it is determined in the sound change determination process (step S161) that the sound output mode is changed to the special sound, and the sound output mode output from the sound wave device 115 is the special sound. It is a flag indicating that there is. If the special sound output flag is set in step S162, a signal indicating the sound output data of the special sound is output to the waveform control board 114 (step S163).

  If the special sound output flag is not set in step S162, it is confirmed whether the daytime background flag is ON (step S164). If the daytime background flag is not ON, a signal instructing sound control data of the night background normal sound is sent. The signal is output to the waveform control board 114 (step S165), and if the daytime background flag is ON, a signal instructing sound control data of the daytime background normal sound is output to the waveform control board 114 (step S166). As described above, the background image is changed when the background change notice is executed in the blackout effect. In step S164, the state of the day / background flag that is turned ON / OFF by the background change notice is determined. Yes.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the sound change determination process (step S161). In the sound change determination process, the CPU 111a first checks whether the special sound output flag is set (step 171). If the special sound output flag is set in step S171, the special sound output selection table is set (step S172). If the special sound output flag is not set in step S171, the normal sound output selection table is set. (Step S173).

  Next, the CPU 111a reads a sound determination random number stored in the RAM 111b mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 (step S174). The sound determination random number is extracted from a counter that updates the sound determination random number when a variation display pattern command is received from the main control board 101, and is stored in the RAM 111b corresponding to the variation pattern command. That is, the sound determination random number read in step S174 is stored in the RAM 111b corresponding to the variation pattern for starting the next variation display.

  Further, in this embodiment, a different determination table is selected according to the type of the variation pattern for starting the variation display next and the sound output mode in the previous variation display. That is, depending on whether it is a big hit (step S175), if it is a big hit, whether it is a probable big hit (step S176), if it is not a big hit, whether to reach (step S179). The non-probable big hit determination table (step S177), the probable big hit determination table (step S178), the reach determination table (step S180), and the loss determination table (step S181) are selected.

  After selecting the determination table in steps S171 to S181 described above, it is confirmed whether or not the sound is a special sound based on the sound determination random number read in step S174 and the selected determination table (step S182). In this case, if the special sound output flag is not set (step S183), the special sound output flag is set (step S184).

  If the special sound output flag is set when it is not a special sound in step S182 (step S185), the special sound output flag is reset (step S186).

  With the above processing, it is possible to change the normal sound corresponding to the background image, and the player can more clearly grasp the change of the background image. Further, the normal sound of the daytime background or the normal sound of the night background is output from the sound wave device 115 according to the type of the background image, and the sound is output when it is determined to change the sound output mode in the sound change determination process (step S161). In order to change the mode to a special sound, when a special sound is output, the player is in a certain state (especially a state where it is likely to be a big hit), and the expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased Can be increased.

  Next, the rendering operation of the liquid crystal display 116 accompanying the decorative pattern variation display will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 72 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effects produced by the liquid crystal display.

  First, a variation display example of the decorative design will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the variation display pattern of variation number 1 in which the big hit determination random number is an outlier in the above-described big hit determination process and no reach is included. The CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 receives information such as the variable display pattern, the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the stop symbol selected so that the right decorative symbol 80c is different from each other. Transmit to the control board 113.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 describes a process of effect display control executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the variable display pattern based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Process data is selected, and control of decorative symbols and the like is started based on the contents described in the process data. That is, the variable display of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c is started in a translucent display manner so that the background image (daytime background image 81) can be seen based on the selected process data (FIG. 60A). At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c change rapidly from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42 (the moving speed is faster than the process in which each of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c is stopped and displayed. Fluctuation) is displayed. Further, the decorative pattern 80b in the middle is variably displayed in an opaque display mode rather than a semi-transparent display mode.

  Then, after the predetermined time elapses based on the process data, the left decorative pattern 80a of the left and right decorative patterns 80a, 80c is stopped and displayed, and the display gradually changes from the high speed fluctuation to the low speed fluctuation display, The display is changed from translucent to an opaque display mode in which the background image (daytime background image 81) cannot be seen through (FIG. 60B). Then, the left decorative design 80a stops and displays the designated stop design (in the figure, “7” is exemplified) (FIG. 60C).

  Similarly to the left decorative design 80a, the right decorative design 80c is changed from a high-speed change to a low-speed change display in a process in which the right decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed based on the process data. To an opaque display mode. Then, the right decorative design 80c stops and displays a stop design (designated as “6” in FIG. 60) designated to be different from the left decorative design 80a (FIG. 60D).

  Next, an example of the effect of the advanced notice effect that displays the character images 70 to 74 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the advanced notice effect of the advanced notice pattern number 11 described above. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the advanced notice effect of the advanced notice pattern number 11, as described above, the variable display pattern, the evolved notice pattern number 11, The control data of the effect lamps 44a and 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound wave device 115 is selected according to the information, and information such as the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern number 11 and the stop pattern is stored in the second electrical control board 113 Send. In addition, a timer set in the control data is started on the sub-integrated board 111. This timer synchronizes with the image display control executed on the basis of the process data selected by the second electrical control board 113, the drive control of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, the effect lamps 44a, 44b, and This is for performing lighting control of the decoration lamp 49 and sound control of the sound wave device 115.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 performs the effect display executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the variable display pattern and the advanced notice pattern number 11 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Process data in which a control process is described is selected, and control of decorative symbols, the above-described character image display, and the like is started based on the contents described in the process data. That is, the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c is started based on the selected process data (FIG. 61 (A)).

  Based on the process data, the character image 71 imitating a wolf man is displayed in the display area 42 (FIG. 61B). Note that the above-described one-step step 1 is the display control of the character image 71 imitating a wolf man from the state where only the character image 70 imitating a monster is displayed on the display area 42 (FIG. 61B). This is a state developed from the 0 stage in which only the character image 70 imitating the monster is displayed and controlled to the 1 stage in which the character image 71 imitating the wolf man is displayed and controlled. .

  After the character image 71 imitating the wolf man in FIG. 61 (B) is displayed and controlled, the process based on the process data is further executed, and the character image 72 imitating the dracula is displayed in the display area 42 when a predetermined period has elapsed. Control is performed (FIG. 61C). This state is the above-described two-stage step 2, and the stage has been developed from the first stage in which the character image 71 imitating the wolf man is controlled to the second stage in which the character image 72 imitating the dracula is controlled. State.

  In FIGS. 61B and 61C, all the mini character images 90 to 93 are controlled to be displayed in the display area 42 based on the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern number 11. In this case, two types of notice effects are simultaneously executed so that the character images 70 to 74 are displayed by the advanced notice effect and the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed in the display area 42 by the mini character notice effect. . Therefore, it is possible to make the notice effect more lively than to execute only one of the advanced notice effect and the mini character notice effect, and the game does not become monotonous for the player, and the decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed. can do. Note that the mini-character notice effect can be executed simultaneously with the advanced notice and the lightning notice effect that cause the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear, as in the advanced notice effect that displays the character images 70 to 74.

  Here, although the description regarding the several layer displayed on the display area 42 is mentioned later, while displaying the mini character images 90-93 on the back surface of the decorative design 80a-80c, the character image 71 imitating a wolf man and Dracula are displayed. Since the imitated character image 72 is displayed in front of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c, the character image 71 imitating a wolf man and the character image 72 imitating a dracula are displayed in front of the mini character images 90 to 93. For example, the mini character image 90 representing the Hiroshi in FIG. 61B is displayed, but the mini character image 90 representing the Hiroshi is displayed by displaying the character image 72 imitating the Dracula in FIG. 61C. Or part of the variable display of the left decorative pattern 80a is not visible. Accordingly, the player is given priority to pay attention to the advance notice effect in which the character images 70 to 74 are displayed rather than the mini character notice effect in which the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed and the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. Can do.

  After the display control of the character image 72 simulating Dracula in FIG. 61 (C), the process based on the process data is further executed, and the character image 73 simulating Franken is displayed in the display area 42 when a predetermined period has elapsed. (FIG. 61D). This state is step 3 of the above-described three stages, and the stage is developed from the two stages in which the character image 72 imitating the Dracula is displayed and controlled to the three stages in which the character image 73 imitating the Franken is displayed and controlled. It is.

  61D, after the display control of the character image 73 imitating Franken, the process based on the process data is further executed, and the character image 70 imitating a monster is displayed in the display area 42 when a predetermined period has elapsed. Control is performed (FIG. 61E). This state is the above-described four-stage step 4, and the stage has been expanded from the three stages in which the character image 73 imitating Franken is displayed and controlled to the four stages in which the character image 70 imitating the monster is displayed and controlled. State.

  In this embodiment, the character images 71 to 73 whose display is controlled in the display area 42 are continuously displayed from the first stage (FIG. 61B) to the third stage (FIG. 61D). Thus, control is performed so that the effect display by a plurality of characters is possible. Further, the player can grasp the stage of the advanced notice effect based on the number of display of the character images 71 to 73 whose display is controlled in the display area 42. Further, as described above, the stage of the advanced notice effect develops. As a result, the degree of expectation for the big hit increases, so that the expectation for the big hit can be increased according to the number of display of the character images 71 to 73.

  Next, a production example of the intense heat notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the intense heat notification effect of the above-described intense heat notification pattern number 3. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the advanced notice pattern No. 6, 7, 11, or 12 of the advanced notice pattern, the intense heat notice pattern number 3 When it is decided to execute the heat notice effect, as described above, it is decided by the character imitating Franken displayed in the advanced notice pattern (step 3 of the advanced notice pattern) and the intense heat notice pattern. In addition to the information such as the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern, the stop pattern, etc., the character that imitates the franken character (step 3 of the intense heat notice pattern) matches the character. Information on the intense heat notice pattern of pattern number 3 is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electric decoration control board 113 corresponds to the intense heat notice pattern of the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern, and the intense heat notice pattern number 3 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Process data describing a process of effect display control executed in the display area 42 to be selected, and control of decorative symbols, image display of the above-described character, etc. based on the contents described in the process data. Start. Unlike the character image 73 simulating the Franken image displayed with the advanced notice pattern at the timing of controlling the display of the character image 73 simulating Franken according to the developed notice pattern, the white color is used as the base. The white character image 76 simulating Franken changed to the color scheme is displayed in the display area 42 (FIG. 62). For example, when it is decided to execute the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 11 and when it is decided to execute the intense heat notice effect of the intense heat notice pattern number 3, FIG. In the scene where display control is performed on the character image 73 simulating the franken shown in FIG. 61 (D) in the advanced notice effect of FIG. 61 (A) to FIG. 61 (E), the white character image simulating the franken shown in FIG. 76 is controlled in the display area 42.

  Further, when it is decided to execute the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 11 and when it is decided to execute the intense heat notice effect of the intense notice pattern number 1, FIG. A) In the scene where the character image 71 imitating the wolf man of FIG. 61B in the advanced notice effect of FIG. 61E is displayed and controlled, the character image 71 is imitated with a wolf man with a different form. When display control of a white character image (not shown) is performed in the display area 42 and it is decided to execute the intense heat notification effect of the intense heat notification pattern number 2, the operations shown in FIGS. 61 (A) to 61 (E) are performed. In the scene where the character image 72 simulating the Dracula in FIG. 61C in the advanced notice effect is displayed, the white character simulating the wolf man with a different color scheme of the clothing instead of the character image 72 61 (A) to 61 (E) are developed when it is decided to control the display of an image (not shown) in the display area 42 and execute the intense heat announcement pattern number 4. In the scene of controlling the display of the character image 70 simulating the monster in FIG. 61 (E) in the type notice effect, a white character image (not shown) simulating a wolf man with a different color scheme is displayed instead of the character image 70. Display control is performed in the area 42.

  Next, an example of the advance notice effect that drives the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the advanced notice effect of the advanced notice pattern number 16 described above. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 16, as described above, the variation display pattern, the evolved notice pattern number 16, , Drive data 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, effect lamps 44a, 44b, decoration lamp 49, and control data for the sound wave device 115 are selected, and a variable display pattern, an advanced notice pattern number 11, a stop pattern, etc. Is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113. In addition, a timer set in the control data is started on the sub-integrated board 111.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 performs the effect display executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the variable display pattern, the advance notice pattern number 16 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Process data in which a control process is described is selected, and control of decoration symbols, the above-described character image display, and the like is started based on the contents described in the process data. That is, the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c is started based on the selected process data.

  It should be noted that in the advanced notice effect of the advanced notice pattern number 16, the character body 150, 150 h, 152 h, 153 f, and 155 are driven and controlled without driving the display of the character images 71 to 73 in the display area 42. This is done by causing 152 and 154 to appear. Further, as described above, the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are controlled by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 by outputting a drive signal to the first electrical decoration control board 112. In the process data selected by the CPU 113a mounted on the illumination control board 113, control data relating to these drive controls is not set. The process data selected corresponding to the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 16 includes the actions of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 by the drive control of the drive motors 150 h, 152 h, 153 f, 155 and the display area 42. Until the predetermined drive control is executed by the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 in order to synchronize the display mode, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner and the predetermined drive control is executed (for example, Control data for controlling the display of the character image 70 is set (when it becomes FIG. 63 (D ′)).

  When the display control of the display area 42 based on the process data is started by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113, that is, when the decorative symbol variation display is started, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 controls. A character 154 that imitates a wolf man by outputting a drive signal to the drive motor 155 based on the data is caused to appear so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 for a predetermined period of time (FIG. 63 (A ′ )). Note that the one-step step 1 ′ described above is a case where a character body 154 imitating a wolf man appears from the state where only the character image 70 imitating a monster is displayed in the display area 42 (A). '), And the stage was developed from the 0 stage where only the character image 70 imitating the monster was controlled to the 1 stage where the character body 154 imitating the wolf man appeared for a predetermined period. State.

  After a character body 154 imitating a wolf man in FIG. 63A appears for a predetermined period so as to cover a part of the display area 42, the CPU 111a further performs processing based on the control data. When a predetermined period has passed, a character 152 that imitates a dracula by outputting a drive signal to the drive motors 152h and 153f appears so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 for a predetermined period. (FIG. 63 (B ′)). This state is the above-described two-stage step 2 ′, and the stage is changed from the first stage in which the character body 154 imitating the wolf man appears for a predetermined period to the second stage in which the character body 152 imitating the dracula appears for a predetermined period. It is a developed state.

  The character body 152 imitating a Dracula in FIG. 63 (B ′) appears so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 for a predetermined period, and then the CPU 111a further executes processing based on the control data. Then, when a predetermined period has elapsed, a character that imitates a franken by outputting a drive signal to the drive motor 150h appears for a predetermined period so as to cover a part of the display area 42 (see FIG. 63 (C ′)). This state is step 3 of the above-described three stages, and the stage is developed from the two stages in which the character body 152 imitating Dracula appears for a predetermined period to the three stages in which the character object 150 imitating Franken appears for a predetermined period. It is in a state.

  After the character body 150 imitating Franken in FIG. 63 (C ′) appears so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 for a predetermined period, the CPU 111a further executes a process based on the control data. When a predetermined period has elapsed, a drive signal is output to the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 to cause the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear. Then, after a predetermined period of time, the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 controls the display of the character image 70 imitating a monster based on the process data (FIG. 63 (E ′)). At this time, the CPU 111a outputs drive signals to the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 based on the control data to accommodate the character bodies 150, 152, and 154. As described above, the operation of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 and the display of the character images 70 to 73 in the display area 42 are synchronized by the timer set in the control data and the timer set in the process data. ing. Note that this state is the above-described four-step step 4, and the step is changed from the three steps in which the character body imitating Franken appears for a predetermined period to the four steps in which the character image 70 imitating the monster is displayed and controlled. It is a developed state.

  When shifting from FIG. 61 (D) to FIG. 61 (E) and when shifting from FIG. 63 (D ′) to FIG. 63 (E ′), control for stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 80a is executed. ing. However, the middle decorative symbol 80b and the right decorative symbol 80c are not stopped and displayed. That is, in this embodiment, the advanced notice effect is executed before the right decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative designs 80a to 80c is started.

  In this embodiment, control is performed so that the appearance directions of the character image and the character body corresponding to the same character are the same. For example, display control is performed so that the character image 71 appears from the left side of the display area 42 in FIG. 61B, and the character body 154 is moved to the left side of the display area 42 by driving the drive motor 155 in FIG. It is comprised so that it may appear from the accommodating part 160 provided in the direction. By configuring in this way, the character image corresponding to the same character and the character member appear from the same direction, so that the player can more clearly understand that the relationship between the character image and the character body is the same. Can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, the advanced notice effect is executed by causing one of the character image and the character member to appear at each stage, and display control of the character image corresponding to the same character at each stage You may comprise so that both a character image and a character body may appear by performing drive control of the drive motor which can operate a character body. With this configuration, the character can be displayed in a more visible manner at each stage, so that the player can easily recognize that the effect is being executed, and the player's sense of expectation Can be further enhanced.

  In this case, it may be configured such that both the character body and the character image appear only when the background image is the night background image 82, and when only one of them appears by such a configuration. You can give an impression that more monsters are making noise at night, so you can give a stronger impression that the monsters start moving at night.

  When both the character body and the character image appear in the advanced notice effect, the appearance direction of the character image may differ from the appearance direction of the character body. That is, in this embodiment, since the character body appears so as to cover a part of the display area 42, an area in which the character image is displayed by the character body by causing the character image and the character body to appear from the same direction. There is a possibility that the character image cannot be visually recognized. This problem can be solved by changing the appearance direction of the character image and the character body.

  In this embodiment, the number of character images to be displayed and controlled in the advanced notice effect is different from the number of character bodies that appear by controlling the drive motor, but the number of character images is different. And the number of character bodies may be the same. That is, in this embodiment, character images 70 to 73 corresponding to four characters (in this example, monster-kun, wolf man, Dracula, Franken) and three characters (in this example, wolf man, Dracula). , Franken) and the character body 150, 152, 154 corresponding to the character body 150, 152, and 154, the four types of character members (in this embodiment, monsters) corresponding to the four characters 70 to 73 are executed. (Kun, wolf man, Dracula, Franken) may be provided to perform the advanced notice effect. Further, the number of character images to be displayed and controlled in the advanced notice effect may be configured to be smaller than the number of character bodies that appear by controlling the driving motor. For example, three characters (wolf) The advanced notice effect may be executed by a character image corresponding to a man, Dracula, Franken) and a character body corresponding to four characters (Monster-kun, Wolf Man, Dracula, Franken).

  Further, in this embodiment, the character body is switched and displayed at each stage. However, even if control is performed so that a plurality of characters can be controlled at each stage by continuously causing the character body to appear. Good. In addition, the player can grasp the stage of the advanced notice effect based on the number of character bodies that appear, and further, as described above, since the stage of the advanced notice effect develops, the big hit expectation increases. The expectation for the big hit can be increased according to the number of character bodies appearing.

  When both the character body and the character image are displayed at the same stage in the advanced notice effect, only one of the character image and the character body is continuously displayed at each stage. You may control as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the stage of the advanced notice effect according to the number of appearances of the character body and the display number of the character images, and further, as described above, the stage of the advanced notice effect is developed. Since the degree of expectation for the big hit increases, the expectation for the big hit can be increased according to the number of character bodies that have appeared.

  Next, an example of the lightning notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 shows a determination example of jackpot determination as production example 1 of the lightning warning effect. The main control board 101 determines that the variation display pattern is “function reach reach, hit” as the variation number 33, and The case where the lightning bolt warning pattern number 2 (twice blackout) is determined as the lightning warning pattern from the lightning bolt warning table for the daytime background on the integrated substrate 111 is shown.

  When the special symbol display is started on the special symbol display 41, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are also displayed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 (FIG. 64A). Specifically, in the vicinity of the center of the display area 42, the display pattern is variably displayed in such a manner that the middle decorative symbol 80b jumps, and a background image is visible on both sides of the central decorative symbol 80b. The left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c that are translucent are displayed in a variable manner in such a manner that the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42. In addition, a daytime background image 81 is displayed in the display area 42, and a character image (monster) 70 is displayed below the decorative pattern 80b in the middle (lower center of the display area 42).

  Next, as the first blackout effect, a darkening image 83 that darkens the display area 42 that controls the display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c and the display of the daytime background image 81 so as to be difficult for the player to visually recognize is predetermined. Time (for example, 1 second) is displayed (FIG. 64B). At this time, the player can recognize that one of a plurality of lightning notice effects has been started, and a special effect with a high expectation of jackpot (a super reach development effect that starts from a spotlight notice) , Etc.) can have a sense of expectation to be performed. Thereafter, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the display area 42 is controlled to continue the contents before the first blackout effect is performed (FIG. 64C).

  Next, as the second blackout effect, the darkness image 83 having a higher darkening degree than the darkness during the first blackout effect is displayed for the first time so that the player is more difficult to see than the first blackout effect. Is displayed for a longer time (for example, 2 seconds) than the production time during the blackout production (FIG. 64D). At this time, the player can recognize that at least the lightning warning pattern number 1 is not the blackout gasse effect, and the second lightning warning pattern number 2 may be performed. However, the expectation that special effects (super-reaching development production and feature reach production, etc. started from spotlight notice) will be performed for the first time will be higher than the first blackout production. This can be improved compared to blackout production. In other words, by performing the blackout effect twice, the expectation that a special effect (such as a super reach development effect or an accessory reach effect started from a spotlight notice) will be gradually improved. be able to. Thereafter, as in the case after the first blackout effect, the display area 42 is controlled to continue the content before the blackout effect is performed (FIG. 64E).

  Next, when the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed, a reach mode (in the figure, the “77” reach mode is illustrated) is formed, and the accessory reach production is started. The character 84 “notice reach” to be notified is displayed (FIG. 64 (F)). At this time, since the content before the blackout effect was continuously displayed after the second blackout effect, a special effect (a spotlight notice or role) with a higher expectation level than a super reach effect was displayed. It is possible to improve the feeling of expectation that it was the second blackout gasse production without the performance of the object reach, etc., and to improve it again by performing the effect reach production. It is possible to give a sharpness to interest. In the character reach production, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 attached to the effect device 40 operate, and still stop according to the state of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, and 168. There is an effect that the decorative pattern 80b that is not displayed is variably displayed.

  Next, in the example 1 of the lightning notice effect, since the variable number 33 “actual reach, hit” is determined, the decorative pattern 80b in the middle stops at the same pattern as the left and right decorative patterns 80a and 80c. By being displayed, the big hit symbol (in the figure, the big hit symbol “777” is illustrated) is fixedly displayed (FIG. 64 (G)). After that, the combination of the decorative symbols that are confirmed and displayed is a jackpot symbol, and the opening image 85 that informs the player that the jackpot game will be started can be displayed and controlled with the above-described multiple types of effects. The character images 70 to 75 are displayed (FIG. 64 (H)).

  FIG. 65 shows, as a lightning warning effect production example 2, a change display pattern determined by the main control board 101 as one of the change numbers 1, 3 to 22, and the sub-integrated board 111 from the daylight background lightning notice table. The case where the background change effect of lightning warning pattern number 3 is determined as the lightning warning pattern is shown. Note that the first blackout effect is performed in the second lightning effect production example 2 as in the first production example.

  After the first blackout effect, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the display area 42 is controlled so as to continue the contents before the first blackout effect is performed (FIG. 65A). After that, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first blackout effect is displayed in the first blackout effect so that the player is more difficult to see than the first blackout effect. A longer time (for example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 65 (B)). Thereafter, the display area 42 is controlled so as to continue the content before the blackout effect is performed, but a night background image 82 different from the background image before the blackout effect is displayed is displayed as the background image. (FIG. 65 (C)). At this time, there will be no special effects (such as spotlight notices or accessory reach effects) that have a higher expectation level than the Super Reach effect. The lightning warning table for lightning backgrounds (Fig. 47) is used to determine the lightning, making it easier to make lightning flashing notifications for lightning warning pattern numbers 4 and 5, and for selecting the developmental warning effect. By using the advanced notice table (FIG. 40), the operating rate of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 is improved, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be enhanced.

  Next, when the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed, a reach mode (in the figure, a reach mode of "77" is illustrated) is formed, and notification that the reach effect is started is notified. The “reach” character 86 is displayed (FIG. 65D). Thereafter, a super reach effect, a super reach development effect, or the like corresponding to any of the change display patterns of the change numbers 1, 3 to 22 determined by the main control board 101 is performed. It is a night background image 82 when the decorative pattern variation display is started in the display area 42, and the background change effect of the lightning warning pattern number 3 from the night background lightning warning table on the sub-integrated board 111 as the lightning warning pattern. If determined, after the second blackout effect, a daytime background image 81 different from the background image before the blackout effect is displayed is displayed as the background image.

  FIG. 66 shows a third example of the lightning notice effect, in which the main control board 101 is determined as one of the change display patterns of the change numbers 4, 6 to 10, 12 to 16, and 18 to 22, and the sub integrated board 111 sets the daylight. The case where the lightning flash effect of lightning warning pattern number 5 is determined as the lightning warning pattern from the background lightning warning table is shown. Note that the first blackout effect is also performed in the lightning bolt notice effect example 3, as in the effect example 1.

  After the first blackout effect, the display area 42 is controlled so that the content before the first blackout effect is continued after a predetermined time has elapsed (FIG. 66A). After that, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first blackout effect is displayed in the first blackout effect so that it is more difficult for the player to see than the first blackout effect. A longer time (for example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 66B). Thereafter, an effect lamp 44a disposed above the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 blinks and lights up, and a lightning flash notice is given to run the lightning (thunder) 87 on the dark image 83 from above the display area 42. As a result, the left decorative pattern 80a (in the figure, “7” is exemplified) is stopped and displayed so as to appear in the dark image 83 by being illuminated by the lightning 87 (FIG. 66C).

  Next, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first and second blackout effects is displayed in the second blackout effect so that the player cannot see (not visible). A time equivalent to the time (for example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 66D). At this time, the left, middle and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are displayed on the right side of the display area 42 in a state where the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and the middle and right decorative symbols 80b and 80c are variably displayed. The lower part is darker than a normal display (for example, when a reach effect or the like is not executed), and is darkly displayed to the extent that it is difficult for the player to view. In this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and displayed by the first lightning flash warning, and the left decorative symbol 80a is continuously stopped and displayed in the dark image 83 thereafter. It is sufficient that the reach mode is formed by the end of the production (in this case, the second lightning flash notice described later), and the left decorative pattern 80a is not stopped and displayed by the first lightning flash notice. In (D), the left decorative design 80a may be in a variable display.

  Next, after a third blackout effect, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the effect lamps 44a and 44b arranged at the upper right of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 flash and light multiple times. When a lightning flash advance notice is performed on the dark image 83 from the right side of the display area 42, the right decorative design is displayed together with the left decorative design 80a that has already been stopped by being illuminated by the lightning 87. 80c (“7” is illustrated in the figure) is stopped and displayed so as to appear in the dark image 83 (FIG. 66E). At this time, since the second lightning flash announcement was made, the player will not be out of reach with normal reach and super reach production, and in other cases, the big hit expectation is high With Super Reach Development and Super Reach Branch Premier production, you can expect a big hit.

  Next, when the left and right decorative symbols 80a, 80c are stopped and displayed, a reach mode (in the figure, a reach mode of "77" is illustrated) is formed, and notification that the reach effect is started is notified. The “reach” character 86 is displayed (FIG. 66F). Thereafter, a super reach effect or a super reach development effect corresponding to any of the change display patterns of change numbers 4, 6 to 10, 12 to 16, and 18 to 22 determined by the main control board 101 is performed. If the lightning bolt warning pattern number 4 is determined as the lightning warning pattern on the sub-integrated board 111, the second lightning flash warning is not performed, but only the first lightning flash warning is performed.

  FIG. 67 shows a lightning bolt notification effect example 4 as a variation display pattern on the main control board 101 as one of the fluctuation numbers 29 and 30 on the main control board 101, and from the lightning bolt warning table for the daytime background on the sub-integrated board 111. The case where the blackout production of the lightning warning pattern number 2 is decided twice as a pattern is shown. It should be noted that the first blackout effect is performed in the lightning warning effect example 4 as well as in the effect example 1.

  After the first blackout effect, when a predetermined time elapses, the display area 42 is controlled to continue the content before the first blackout effect is performed (FIG. 67A). Thereafter, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first blackout effect is displayed in the first blackout effect so that the player is more difficult to see than the first blackout effect. A longer time (for example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 67 (B)). Thereafter, a spotlight notice is made under the center of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 while a character (a character image (monster) 70 is illustrated) appears in the spotlight 88 (FIG. 5). 67 (C)). At this time, since the spotlight notice is performed, the player can confirm that the super reach development effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is performed, and can improve the expectation of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, since the super reach development effect corresponding to the character is performed, it is possible to recognize the high expectation degree of the big hit, and it is possible to have various feelings of expectation depending on the character that has appeared. Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are the normal decorative symbols (for example, when the reach effect or the like is not executed) in the lower right portion of the display area 42 (the portion that is not illuminated by the spotlight 88). This is smaller than when the variable display is executed, and is darkly displayed so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Next, the character image (monster) 70 lowers the start image 89 for starting the super reach development effect corresponding to the character whose image display is controlled by the spotlight notice from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. An effect is performed (FIG. 67 (D)). Thereafter, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed as a super reach development effect corresponding to one of the variable display patterns of the variable numbers 29 and 30 determined on the main control board 101, thereby reaching the reach mode ( In the same figure, the super reach development effect is started in a state where the reach form of “77” is formed) (FIG. 67 (E)).

  In the lightning flash notice and the spotlight notice, the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 is set to the dark image 83 by the blackout effect, so that the lightning (lightning) 87 can be run or the spotlight 88 can be bathed on the character. It is a notice effect that becomes possible. Therefore, it can be said that the lightning flash notice and the spotlight notice are effects unique to the dark display by performing the blackout effect.

  As described above, according to the configuration of this embodiment, it is difficult to visually recognize the entire display area where the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are displayed in the display area 42, the character image 70, and the like. By displaying the dark image 83 for a predetermined time, the player pays attention to the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c until the dark image 83 is displayed, the character image 70, and the like. This makes it possible to effectively make the notice effect (blackout effect) that the player wants to be aware of. In addition, after making the notice effect start by the blackout effect, the effect lamps 44a and 44b of the effect device 40 are turned on and blinked as the notice effect, and the lightning 87 is displayed in the display area 42. By displaying the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c in a visible manner in such a production manner, it is possible to effectively pay attention to a notice production that the player wants to be aware of. Therefore, by noticing and paying attention to the notice effect that the player wants to be aware of, even if the player plays a game for a long time, the game does not become monotonous and suppresses a decrease in the interest of the game. Can do.

  Note that, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, a dark image that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire area where information such as the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80 a to 80 c and the character image 70 is displayed in the display area 42. 83 is displayed for a predetermined time, but it is sufficient that the player cannot pay attention to the information display. For example, only a bright image or a background image is displayed in the display area 42 as an image different from the dark image 83. Alternatively, the information display may be concealed by erasing an image including the information display by turning off the power of the display area 42 or providing an operable concealment member in the effect device 40 or the like.

  In addition, conventionally, there are some cases where a plurality of characters are displayed, and other effects other than the special symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display device are performed lively. It was rarely derived and did not make the character aware. However, such a presentation can be made conscious by the configuration of the present embodiment.

  Next, an example of the mini character notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing the mini character notice effect of the mini character notice pattern No. 1 described above. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the mini character notice pattern No. 1 mini character notice pattern, as described above, the variable display pattern, the mini character notice pattern No. 1 mini character notice pattern, and the stop Information such as symbols is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 performs the effect display control executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the variable display pattern and the mini character notice pattern number 1 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. The process data in which the above process is described is selected, and control of the decorative design, the above-described mini character image display, and the like based on the contents described in the process data is started. That is, the variable display of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c is started in a translucent display mode based on the selected process data. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c change rapidly from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42 (the moving speed is faster than the process in which each of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c is stopped and displayed. Fluctuation) is displayed. Further, for the decorative pattern 80b in the middle, since the mini character image display by the mini character notice is not performed on the back side, it is not necessary to make the back side visible to the player, and the display mode is not a translucent display mode but an opaque display mode. The display is variable. However, even if the decorative pattern 80b in the inside is variably displayed in a translucent display mode, it does not affect the player's visual recognition.

  Then, based on the process data, the display of the mini character image 90 representing the Hiroshi in the form of opening the upper body and opening the door displayed on the lower right side of the display area 42 and on the back of the right decorative design 80c. Display control is performed (FIG. 68A). At this time, the right decorative design 80c is variably displayed in a translucent display mode, and the player can visually recognize the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi on the back of the right decorative design 80c. Therefore, the player does not need to move the viewpoint between the right decorative symbol 80c and the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi, and displays the Hiroshi while gazing at the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c. The mini character image 90 can be visually recognized.

  Then, after the predetermined time has elapsed based on the process data, the door displayed on the back of the right decorative design 80a is closed while the left decorative design 80a is stopped and displayed among the left and right decorative designs 80a and 80c. Then, the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi is controlled to be hidden in the display area 42 (FIG. 68 (B)). At this time, the left decorative design 80a is gradually changed from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation display, and is changed from translucent to opaque display mode. Therefore, even if the player is gazing at the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi, the player can surely recognize that the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and displayed. Then, the left decorative design 80a stops and displays the designated stop design (“7” is illustrated in FIG. 68) (FIG. 68C).

  Similarly to the left decorative design 80a, the right decorative design 80c is changed from a high-speed change to a low-speed change display in a process in which the right decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed based on the process data. To an opaque display mode. Then, the right decorative design 80c stops and displays a stop design (designated as “6” in FIG. 68) designated to be different from the left decorative design 80a (FIG. 68D).

  In this embodiment, a display area having a smaller display area than the respective variable display areas of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c, that is, inside the variable display areas of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c. The mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed, and the mini character images 90 to 93 are easily visible to the player. Note that it is not necessary to move the viewpoint between the decorative symbols 80a to 80c displayed in the display region 42 and the mini character images 90 to 93, and characters are displayed in some display regions of the decorative symbol variable display regions. Even if the image is displayed, the character image may be displayed in all the display areas in the decorative symbol variation display area. Further, for example, the mini character image may be displayed in a display area having a display area larger than that of the decorative symbol variation display region so that the decoration symbol variation display region and the mini character image display region overlap.

  Here, in the liquid crystal display 116, display control is performed on the display area 42 as one effect image by superimposing a plurality of layers. Here, the image data of the background image (day background image 81 or night background image 82), mini character images 90 to 93, left / middle / right decorative symbols 80a to 80c, etc. The image data stored in the ROM 113b is read out separately to the RAM 113c of the second electrical decoration control board 113 at a predetermined timing based on the process data, and is output to the liquid crystal display 116. It is displayed in the display area 42 as a layer. Priorities displayed in the display area 42 are set for these image data (a plurality of layers). By superposing upper layers in order from the lowest layer, priority is given to higher layers. Are displayed in the display area 42.

  A plurality of layers for displaying the mini character notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 shows an explanation of a plurality of layers for displaying the above-described advanced notice effect in which steps 1, 2, and 3 of the advanced notice pattern are executed, and the mini character notice effect of the mini character notice pattern number 11 described above. FIG. The plurality of layers for executing the mini character notice effect include a background layer 42a in which a background image (day background image 81 or night background image 82) is displayed as at least the lowest layer, and a mini as a first middle layer. The mini character layer 42b on which the character images 90 to 93 are displayed and the left, middle and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are displayed in a variable manner as the second middle layer (the higher layer than the first middle layer). The symbol layer 42c to be displayed and the notice character layer 42d in which the character images 70 to 75 are displayed as the highest layer are configured.

  In the background layer 42a, as shown in FIG. 69A, a daytime background image 81 is depicted as a background image, a door 94a at the lower right, a door 94b at the upper left, a door 94c at the upper right, and a door 94c at the lower left. A door 94d is depicted. In addition, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the mini character layer 42b has a mini character image 90 showing a Hiroshi at a position corresponding to the lower right door 94a of the background layer 42a, and a position corresponding to the lower left door 94b. A mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi's sister, a mini character image 92 imitating a triplet at a position corresponding to the upper right door 94c, and a mini character image imitating a monster at a position corresponding to the lower left door 94d. 93 is depicted. Note that the mini character images 90 to 93 include a depiction of a door that is in a half-open state together with the mini character.

  Then, by overlapping the background layer 42a and the mini character layer 42b that is higher than the background layer 42a, the doors 94a to 94d depicted in the daytime background image 81 are not visible, and the mini character image 90 to 93 becomes visible. It should be noted that only the necessary mini character images among the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed on the mini character layer 42b in accordance with the mini character notice pattern number. For example, when the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern number 1 is determined, only the mini character image 90 is displayed on the mini character area 42b, and as shown in FIG. Only the character image 90 representing Hiroshi is displayed in the display area 42.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the symbol layer 42c includes a left decorative symbol 80a in a semi-transparent display mode and a middle decorative symbol in an opaque display mode at a position overlapping the display region of the mini character images 91 and 93. The right decorative design 80c is depicted in a translucent display manner at a position overlapping the display area of the mini character images 90 and 92. Then, by superimposing the mini character layer 42b and the symbol layer 42c, which is higher than the mini character layer 42b, the back of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are transparent during the display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. The mini character images 90 to 93 are visible to the player.

  It should be noted that the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are displayed in a stopped state on the symbol layer 42c in a non-transparent display manner in a position overlapping with the display area of the mini character image 93 imitating Kai-chan. The right decorative design 80c is depicted in an opaque display manner at a position overlapping the display area of the mini character image 90 simulating Hiroshi. When the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed by superimposing the mini character layer 42b and the symbol layer 42c that is higher than the mini character layer 42b, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are displayed. The position where the mini character images 90 and 93 are depicted is not visible to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the notice character area 42d is opaque at a position overlapping the display areas of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c and a part of the display area of the mini character images 91 and 93. In the display mode, a character image 71 imitating a wolf man, a character image 72 imitating Dracula, and a character image 73 imitating Franken are depicted. Then, by superimposing the mini character layer 42b and the symbol layer 42c and the notice character layer 42d that is higher than these layers, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c and the mini character notice are performed during the advanced notice effect. Character images 70 to 73 in the advanced notice effect are visible to the player in front of the mini character images 90 to 93 in the effect. The blank display area in the mini character layer 42b, the symbol layer 42c, and the notice character layer 42d is a transparent display mode, and can transmit the lower layer.

  FIG. 69 shows only the layer on which the daytime background image 81, the mini character images 90 to 93, the left / middle / right decorative symbols 80a to 80c, and the character images 70 to 73 in the advanced notice effect are displayed. In addition to these layers, based on the image data stored in the ROM 113b of the second electrical control board 113, there are a character image 70 imitating a monster displayed with a background image, a dark image 83 in a blackout effect, and the like. Has a layer to be displayed. The character images 70 to 75 displayed in the blackout effect are displayed on the same layer as the notice character layer 42d on which the character images 70 to 73 in the advanced notice are displayed. Then, background image (day background image 81 or night background image 82) <mini character image 90-93 in mini character notice effect <character image 70 imitating monster-kun (displayed in the lower center of display area 42) <left / middle / Right decorative designs 80a to 80c <character images 70 to 75 in advance notice effect (character images 70 to 73 in advanced notice effect or character images 71 to 75 in black out effect) <dark image 83 in black out effect Priorities displayed in the display area 42 are set.

  Further, since the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 described above appear so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42, an advanced notice effect that causes the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear is executed. Some of the mini character images 90 to 93 and the decorative symbols 80a to 80c are not visible to the player. In other words, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear with a higher priority than all the images displayed in the display area 42. For example, when mini character images 90 to 93 in the mini character notice effect are displayed, by driving the character body 154 imitating a wolf man, one of the mini character image 91 representing the Hiroshi sister and one of the left decorative symbols 80a. The part becomes invisible. Therefore, the player is given priority to the advance notice effect in which the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are driven over the mini character notice effect in which the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed and the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. Can be made.

  In this embodiment, the design layer 42c is set higher than the mini character layer 42b, and the mini character images 90 to 93 are visible through the back of the left and right decorative designs 80a and 80c. It is sufficient that the viewpoint does not need to be moved between the 80a to 80c and the mini character images 90 to 93. For example, the mini character layer 42b is higher than the symbol layer 42c, and the character images 70 to 73 in the advanced notice effect are used. The mini character images 90 to 93 may be displayed on the front side of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c so as to be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. In this case, the decorative symbols 80a and 80c may be displayed in an opaque display mode.

  In this embodiment, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are variably displayed in a semi-transparent display mode, so that the back of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c can be seen transparently. 93 can be visually recognized, but the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c may be variably displayed so that the mini character images 90 to 93 can be visually recognized. For example, the left and right decorative symbols 80a are displayed in an opaque display mode. , 80c are displayed with high-speed fluctuation, and the mini character images 90 to 93 are visually recognized by using the visual effect of the after image of the mini character images 90 to 93 visible between the decorative symbols in the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c. It may be possible.

  Next, an example of the effect of the normal reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 (A) and 71 (B). The normal reach effect is executed when any of the variation numbers 3 to 22 and 35 is determined as the variation display pattern on the main control board 101. In other words, the normal reach production is performed when any of the above-described advanced notice effect, lightning notice effect example 2 (background change notice), effect example 3 (lightning flash notice) is executed, and In the case where it is not executed, the effect is executed after the reach mode is formed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed to form a reach mode (in FIG. 70, a reach mode of "77" is illustrated). When the “reach” character 86 is displayed to notify that the reach production is started, the left decorative pattern 80a forming the reach mode is displayed at the upper left of the display area 42, as shown in FIG. Is displayed smaller than when the normal decorative pattern variation display is executed (for example, when the reach effect or the like is not executed) (the left decorative pattern 80a of “7” is displayed smaller in the same figure). The right decorative design 80c forming the reach mode is displayed smaller in the upper right part of the display area 42 than when the normal decorative design is displayed (in the same figure). , “7” right decorative design 80c is displayed small It illustrates the case was). Further, the middle decorative symbol 80b is displayed in a larger size at the lower center of the display area 42 than when the normal decorative symbol variation display is executed (in the same figure, “8” middle decorative symbol 80b is displayed. Example of a large display). Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), a display area is displayed in the portrait 90 of “Daio” in the monster house displayed by the background images (the day background image 81 or the night background image 82) of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. An effect image in which all the other items displayed on 42 are drawn in a spiral shape is displayed, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are rotated about the vertical virtual vertical axis as a rotation axis. Is done.

  Here, the rotation of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c described above will be described with reference to FIGS. First, during normal symbol fluctuations other than during symbol rotation, as shown in FIG. 70D, the decorative symbol 80 includes a numeric-shaped arrangement identifying unit 121 in which a character 123 is depicted, and a background image 124. The depth display unit 122 that is the depicted thick portion, and thus the variable display is performed in a state of being three-dimensionally displayed on the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 that is a two-dimensional space (plane). Is called. Specifically, as described above, the left and right decorative symbols are changed in such a display manner that the reel is rotating from the upper side to the lower side of the display region 42, and the middle decorative symbols are displayed on the display region 42. It is changed in such a display manner as to jump around the center. However, the three-dimensional display at the time of such normal symbol variation displays the decorative symbol 80 in a three-dimensional manner by displaying the depth display unit 122 that displays the depth of the array identification unit 121 two-dimensionally. In other words, the display ratio between the array identification unit 121 and the depth display unit 122 constituting the decorative design 80 is kept substantially constant (generally, the sequence identification unit 121 is 70% and the depth display unit 122 is 30%). The change display is performed.

  On the other hand, when the symbol is rotated, the decorative symbol 80 is rotated around the virtual axis 120 (vertical vertical line) set in the virtual three-dimensional space of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. . That is, as shown in FIGS. 70E to 70H, the display ratios of the array identification unit 121 and the depth display unit 122 change every moment with the rotation of the decorative design 80. The decorative pattern 80 is displayed as if it were a three-dimensional substance in the display area 42 of the dimensional space (plane). The symbol display mode of the medium decorative symbol 80b will be described as an example. In the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 70E (the symbol display mode during normal symbol variation), the display ratio of the array identification unit 121 is the depth display unit. The display ratio of the depth display section 122 gradually increases as the rotation progresses, and the display of the array identification section 121 and the depth display section 122 is similar to the symbol display mode shown in FIG. The display ratio is substantially the same (50% for the array identification unit 121 and 50% for the depth display unit 122). Thereafter, the rotation further proceeds (through the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 70G), and the display ratio of the depth display unit 122 becomes almost 100% as in the symbol display mode shown in FIG. The decorative design 80 of only the depth display part 122 is displayed. Thereafter, reverse rotation is performed, and after the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 70 (G), the display ratio of the array identification unit 121 gradually increases, and as shown in the symbol display mode shown in FIG. After the display ratios of the identification unit 121 and the depth display unit 122 become substantially the same, the reverse rotation proceeds, and the display returns to the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 70E (the symbol display mode during normal symbol variation). By repeatedly changing the display ratios of the array identification unit 121 and the depth display unit 122 described above, the decorative symbol 80 is rotated (including reverse rotation). However, the change of the display ratio of the arrangement | sequence identification part 121 and the depth display part 122 is performed in a series of flows accompanying rotation of the decoration symbol 80. FIG.

  Then, after the above-mentioned decorative symbols 80 (left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c) are rotated for a predetermined time, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are shown in FIG. 70 (E). The rotation is stopped in the display mode (the symbol display mode at the time of normal symbol variation), and the image 90 is sucked into the portrait 90 in this display mode. On the other hand, the middle decorative symbol 80b is stopped rotating in a symbol display mode (the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 70H) in which the display ratio of the depth display unit 122 is almost 100%, and is sucked into the portrait 90. (See FIGS. 71A and 71B). Thereafter, the image for the super reach branch effect is displayed, and the transition from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect is confirmed.

  In addition, when any of the variation numbers 3 and 4 is determined as the variation display pattern on the main control board 101, that is, when the display result of the deviation is derived after executing the normal reach effect, and after executing the normal reach effect When the jackpot display result is derived, after the above-described decorative symbols 80a to 80c are rotated, the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 70 (E) (symbol display mode during normal symbol variation) is all used. By stopping the rotation of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c, the final display result is derived and the variation display of the decorative symbols is terminated. That is, the display result is derived without displaying the effect in which the decorative symbols 80a to 80c are sucked into the portrait 90 and the image for the super reach branch effect. Accordingly, when the effect of displaying the image for the super reach branching effect is not performed after the decorative symbols 80a to 80c are sucked into the portrait 90, the super reach effect having a higher degree of expectation of the big hit than the normal reach effect at that time. It can be recognized that the super reach development effect is not performed. In other words, when the effect of displaying the image for the super reach branching effect is performed after the decorative symbols 80a to 80c are sucked into the portrait 90, the super reach production or the development of the super reach having a higher degree of expectation of the big hit than the normal reach production. It can be recognized that the production is performed, and the expectation that becomes a big hit can be enhanced.

  Further, as the effect display for rotating the decorative pattern 80, the horizontal display shown in FIG. 70 (D) is used in addition to the rotation using the vertical perpendicular line (virtual axis 120) in the normal reach effect as the rotation axis. An effect display is performed in which the decorative symbol 80 is rotated about the virtual axis 120a that is a virtual perpendicular to the direction. In addition, the “moon” pattern is drawn on the upper surface of the thick portion (depth display portion 122) of the decorative pattern 80, and the “lake” pattern is drawn on the lower surface. These “moon” and “lake” patterns can be visually recognized.

  Next, an example of the super reach branch effect (branch effect notice) will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 (C) to 71 (H) and FIG. 71 (C) to 71 (H) are explanatory views showing the branch effect notice of the branch effect notice pattern number 5 in the first-type branch effect notice pattern described above. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the branch effect advance notice of the branch effect advance notice pattern number 5 in the first type branch effect advance notice pattern, as described above, the variable display pattern and the stop pattern The information of the branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern number 5 is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113 together with such information.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 performs an effect executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the branch effect notice pattern No. 5 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Process data describing a display control process is selected, and control of character image display is started based on the contents described in the process data.

  After the decorative pattern 80 (left, middle, and right decorative patterns 80a to 80c) is drawn into the spiral display mode depicted in the portrait 90, the spiral display mode is drawn based on the process data. The displayed portrait 90 is controlled over the entire display area 42 (FIG. 71C). After that, as a first branch effect notice, an impact sound of “passing” that tears the spiral display mode is output from the sound wave device 115, and a character image 71 imitating a wolf man is displayed on the portrait 90 ( FIG. 71 (D)). Here, it is a mode with higher brightness than the spiral display mode, and the face of the wolf man after transformation is overlapped with the face of the wolf man before transformation, and is displayed in an enlarged form on the entire portrait 90, The branch effect notice is an effect that has an impact on the player.

  Next, an erasing sound of “shwar” that pulls back the character image 71 simulating a wolf man to a spiral display mode is output from the sound wave device 115 and a portrait 90 on which a spiral display mode is drawn is displayed again. This is displayed in the area 42 (FIG. 71 (E)). After that, as the second branch effect notice, the impact sound of “passy” that tears the spiral display mode is output from the sound wave device 115 as in the first branch effect notice, and the portrait 90 is imitated with a dracula. The character image 72 is displayed (FIG. 71 (F)). Again, this is a mode with a higher brightness than the spiral display mode, and the Dracula's face is displayed in an enlarged mode on the entire portrait 90, thereby making the branching effect notice an effect that has an impact on the player. .

  Next, an erasing sound “Shwar” that pulls back the character image 72 simulating Dracula to the spiral display mode is output from the sound wave device 115 and the portrait 90 on which the spiral display mode is drawn is displayed again in the display area. 42 (FIG. 71 (G)). After that, as the third branch effect notice, the impact sound “prick” that tears the spiral display mode is output from the sonic device 115 as in the first and second branch effect notices, and the portrait 90 is displayed. A character image 73 simulating Franken is displayed (FIG. 71 (H)). Again, this is a mode with a higher brightness than the spiral display mode, and the Franken's face is displayed in an enlarged mode on the entire portrait 90, thereby making the branching effect notice an effect that has an impact on the player. . In this case, one of the variation numbers 17 to 22 should already be determined as the variation display pattern, and after executing the third branch effect notice, the franken displayed in the third branch effect notice is displayed. A Franken reach effect is displayed in which the same character image as the imitated character image 73 is displayed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, based on the spiral display mode in which the decorative symbols 80 (left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c) are sucked in, the impact of the branching effect notice is made three times in a short time. By performing in a certain manner, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances interest. Further, at the timing when the character image is displayed on the portrait 90, a branching effect warning sound of an impact sound “Pashi” and an erasing sound “Shwer” is output from the sound wave device 115. By clarifying the display start of the image and the display start of the spiral display mode (end of display of the character image), the player can more clearly grasp the change of the display mode. In addition, since the branch effect warning sound is output at a good tempo, it is possible to further enhance the expectation that a reach effect with a high expectation level for big hits is derived.

  If it is decided to execute the second branch effect notice pattern, the character image imitating the monster is displayed on the portrait 90 in the third branch effect notice (FIG. 72A). For example, when it is decided to execute the second branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern number 1, the Franken shown in FIG. 71 (H) in the branch effect notice shown in FIGS. When the displayed character image 73 is controlled to be displayed on the portrait 90, the character image 70 simulating the monster in FIG. 72A is controlled instead of the character image 73 simulating Franken.

  When it is decided to execute the third kind branch effect notice pattern, the character image imitating Phantom-chan is controlled to be displayed on the portrait 90 in the third branch effect notice (FIG. 72 (B)). For example, when it is decided to execute the third kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern number 1, the Franken of FIG. 71 (H) in the branch effect notice of FIGS. 71 (C) to (H) is simulated. When the displayed character image 73 is controlled to be displayed on the portrait 90, the character image 74 imitating the monster in FIG. 72B is controlled instead of the character image 73 imitating Franken.

  As shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, the portrait 90 displayed as the branch effect notice is displayed at the timing when each character image is displayed, and the left and right decorative symbols 80a forming the reach mode. , 80c are stopped (not shown in FIGS. 71D, 71F, and 71H). The left decorative symbol 80a is displayed at a lower stop in the upper left part of the display area 42 than when the normal decorative symbol variable display is executed (for example, when the reach effect or the like is not executed), and the right decorative symbol 80c. Is displayed in the upper right part of the display area 42 in a smaller stop than when a normal decorative symbol variation display is executed.

  Also, in the branching effect presentation notice, display control of any of the character images 70 to 74 is performed on the portrait 90 in the display area 42 and the drive motors 150h, 152h, 1543f, and 155 are driven in the third branch presentation notice. This is performed by causing the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear under control. Further, the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are controlled by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated substrate 111 by outputting a drive signal to the first electrical control board 112, and thus the second electrical control board 113. In the process data selected by the CPU 113a mounted on the control data, control data relating to these drive controls is not set. In order to synchronize the action of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 by the drive control of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 and the display mode of the display area 42 to the process data selected corresponding to the branch effect notice pattern. In addition, the control for controlling the display of any of the character images 70 to 74 at the timing when predetermined drive control is executed by the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 (for example, when it becomes FIG. 71 (H)). Data is set.

  For example, when it is decided to execute the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern number 5 and it is decided to execute the branch effect effect pattern of the branch effect effect notice pattern number 2 In the scene of controlling the display of the character image 73 imitating Franken in the portrait 90 of FIG. 71 (H) in the branch effect notice of FIGS. 71 (C) to 71 (H), a drive signal is output to the drive motor 150h. The character body 150 imitating Franken appears for a predetermined period so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 (refer to FIG. 63 (C ′) for the appearance of the character body 150). In this way, a game that pays attention to the branch effect notice executed in the display area 42 by executing the branch role effect notice that drives and controls the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 as a part of the branch effect notice. It is possible to give a strong impression to a person, and it is possible to give a strong impression of which of the super reach effects is executed after the branch effect notice (branch role effect notice). Further, since the big hit expectation degree when the branching effect production notice pattern is executed is set high, when the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit game state is increased. Can do.

It is a front view which shows a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine of the state which open | released the main body frame and the front frame. It is a front view which shows a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a front unit and a rear unit. It is the front view which showed the rear unit independently. It is the front view which showed the state which removed the cover member from the rear unit. It is detail drawing of the character body located in the right side seeing from the front. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is detail drawing of the character body located upwards from the front. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is detail drawing of the character body located in the left side seeing from the front. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is two perspective views which divided and showed the state which combined the front unit and the rear unit mutually. It is the perspective view which showed the front unit and the rear unit from the angle different from FIG. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a front unit. It is the figure which expanded and showed the right side edge part of the front unit. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view in the left side edge part of a front unit. It is the perspective view which showed the overlapping relationship of a front unit and a rear unit. In FIG. 22, it is a top view of the operation | movement mechanism containing the cross section along XX. It is the figure which expanded and showed the lower edge part of the front unit. It is a block diagram which shows a main board | substrate and a peripheral board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by the main control board. It is a table | surface figure which shows the random number updated by the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process performed with a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit determination process used as the subroutine of a special symbol fluctuation process. It is a flowchart which shows the change display pattern setting process used as the subroutine of a special symbol change process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the fluctuation | variation display pattern selected by the main control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the form of a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a notice effect and a reach effect. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control process performed with a subintegrated board. It is a table | surface figure which shows the random number updated with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol setting process used as the subroutine of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the notice selection process used as the subroutine of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the advanced type advance notice selection process used as the subroutine of an advance notice selection process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the development type notice pattern for daytime backgrounds selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows the development notice pattern for night backgrounds selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a list display figure which shows an evolution type notice pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the intense heat notice selection process used as the subroutine of a notice selection process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the intense heat warning pattern selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a list display figure showing an intense heat notice pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the lightning bolt notice selection process used as the subroutine of a notice selection process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the lightning warning pattern for daytime backgrounds selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows the lightning warning pattern for night backgrounds selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a list display figure which shows a lightning bolt notice pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the mini character notice selection process used as the subroutine of a notice selection process. It is a list figure which shows the mini character notice pattern selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows a mini character notice pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the branch production notice selection process used as the subroutine of a notice selection process. It is a list figure which shows the branch production announcement pattern selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows a branch production notice pattern. It is a table | surface figure which shows the branch accessory effect notice pattern selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows a branch character effect notice notice pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control process used as the subroutine of effect control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the sound determination table which determines a sound output aspect. It is a flowchart which shows the sound change determination process used as the subroutine of a sound control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the screen structure by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is a table which determines a big hit fluctuation display pattern. It is a table for determining a reach deviation variation display pattern. It is a table which determines a deviation variation display pattern.

Explanation of symbols

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
40 rendering device 42 display areas 44a, 44b rendering lamps 70-75 character image 76 white character images 80a-80c left, middle and right decorative pattern 83 dark image 90-93 mini character image 100 main board 101 main control board 110 peripheral board 111 Sub-integrated board 113 Second electrical decoration control board 114 Waveform control board 115 Sonic device 116 Liquid crystal display 150, 152, 154 Character body 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 Drive motor

Claims (1)

A winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a player a profit based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a plurality of fluctuations comprising a predetermined effect mode according to the determination result by the winning determination means. A game machine comprising: a display device that displays one variation display pattern among the display patterns and makes the player recognize whether or not to grant profits,
Main control means for performing main game control of the gaming machine;
Peripheral control means for performing control based on a command transmitted from the main control means;
Storage means for storing each of the plurality of variation display patterns displayed on the rendering device as a variation display table for each of the predetermined rendering modes;
The predetermined production mode is:
The big hit effect mode when the determination result is a big hit, the reach off time mode when the reach is out of reach with the reach mode, and the off time mode of play when the hit other than the big hit and reach is off. Have
The storage means
A table in which one variable display pattern serving as the big hit effect mode and a command among the plurality of variable display patterns is associated with each other is stored in a predetermined number for each of the variable display patterns serving as the big hit effect mode. Big hit hour variation display table storage means,
Of the plurality of variation display patterns, a table in which one variation display pattern that becomes the reach-off-direction effect mode is associated with a command, and a predetermined number for each of the variable display patterns that become the reach-off-time effect mode. Reach out-of-reach fluctuation display table storage means;
A table in which one variation display pattern that becomes the off-time effect mode and the command among the plurality of variable display patterns is associated with each other is stored for each of the variable display patterns that become the off-time effect mode. Off-time fluctuation display table storage means,
Random number updating means for updating the variable display pattern random number within a predetermined range every predetermined time;
Random number reading means for reading the variable display pattern random number;
The big hit time fluctuation display table storage means, the reach deviation fluctuation display table storage means and the loss fluctuation fluctuation display table storage means,
Each variable display pattern of the stored variable display pattern is stored to be read by the variable display pattern random number consisting of the same denominator read by the random number reading means,
The main control means includes
The winning determination means, the random number updating means, the random number reading means,
A variation display pattern corresponding to the variation display pattern random number consisting of the same denominator read by the random number reading unit according to the determination result by the winning determination unit is displayed as the big hit hour variation display table storage unit, the reach Fluctuation display pattern determining means for selecting and determining either from the deviation fluctuation display table storage means or the deviation fluctuation display table storage means;
A game machine comprising: command output means for reading a command corresponding to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means and outputting the command to the peripheral control means.